WO2008156607A1 - Substituted pyrimidinones - Google Patents

Substituted pyrimidinones Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2008156607A1
WO2008156607A1 PCT/US2008/007278 US2008007278W WO2008156607A1 WO 2008156607 A1 WO2008156607 A1 WO 2008156607A1 US 2008007278 W US2008007278 W US 2008007278W WO 2008156607 A1 WO2008156607 A1 WO 2008156607A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
trifluoromethyl
pyrimidin
cyclohexyl
compound
cis
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2008/007278
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Charles A. Blum
Xiaozhang Zheng
Isamir Martinez
Bertrand L. Chenard
Xuechun Zhang
Original Assignee
Neurogen Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Neurogen Corporation filed Critical Neurogen Corporation
Publication of WO2008156607A1 publication Critical patent/WO2008156607A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D239/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings
    • C07D239/02Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D239/24Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D239/28Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D239/32One oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atom
    • C07D239/34One oxygen atom
    • C07D239/36One oxygen atom as doubly bound oxygen atom or as unsubstituted hydroxy radical
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D239/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings
    • C07D239/02Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D239/24Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D239/28Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D239/46Two or more oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms
    • C07D239/47One nitrogen atom and one oxygen or sulfur atom, e.g. cytosine
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D239/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings
    • C07D239/02Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D239/24Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D239/28Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D239/46Two or more oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms
    • C07D239/56One oxygen atom and one sulfur atom
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D409/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D409/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D409/04Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D413/04Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/04Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond

Definitions

  • This invention relates generally to substituted pyrimidinones that have useful pharmacological properties.
  • the invention further relates to the use of such compounds for treating conditions related to capsaicin receptor activation, for identifying other agents that bind to capsaicin receptor, and as probes for the detection and localization of capsaicin receptors.
  • nociceptors A wide variety of physical and chemical stimuli induce activation of such neurons in mammals, leading to recognition of a potentially harmful stimulus. Inappropriate or excessive activation of nociceptors, however, can result in debilitating acute or chronic pain.
  • Neuropathic pain involves pain signal transmission in the absence of stimulus, and typically results from damage to the nervous system. In most instances, such pain is thought to occur because of sensitization in the peripheral and central nervous systems following initial damage to the peripheral system (e.g., via direct injury or systemic disease). Neuropathic pain is typically burning, shooting and unrelenting in its intensity and can sometimes be more debilitating that the initial injury or disease process that induced it.
  • neuropathic pain is frequently non-responsive or only partially responsive to conventional opioid analgesic regimens.
  • Treatments employing the N-methyl-D-aspartate antagonist ketamine or the alpha(2)-adrenergic agonist clonidine can reduce acute or chronic pain, and permit a reduction in opioid consumption, but these agents are often poorly tolerated due to side effects.
  • Topical treatment with capsaicin has been used to treat chronic and acute pain, including neuropathic pain.
  • Capsaicin is a pungent substance derived from the plants of the Solanaceae family (which includes hot chili peppers) and appears to act selectively on the small diameter afferent nerve fibers (A-delta and C fibers) that are believed to mediate pain.
  • the response to capsaicin is characterized by persistent activation of nociceptors in peripheral tissues, followed by eventual desensitization of peripheral nociceptors to one or more stimuli. From studies in animals, capsaicin appears to trigger C fiber membrane depolarization by opening cation selective channels for calcium and sodium.
  • Similar responses are also evoked by structural analogues of capsaicin that share a common vanilloid moiety.
  • One such analogue is resiniferatoxin (RTX), a natural product of Euphorbia plants.
  • RTX resiniferatoxin
  • VR vanilloid receptor
  • the capsaicin response is competitively inhibited (and thereby antagonized) by another capsaicin analog, capsazepine, and is also inhibited by the non-selective cation channel blocker ruthenium red, which binds to VR with no more than moderate affinity (typically with a K 1 value of no lower than 140 ⁇ M).
  • Rat and human vanilloid receptors have been cloned from dorsal root ganglion cells.
  • the first type of vanilloid receptor to be identified is known as vanilloid receptor type 1 (VRl, also known as TRPVl), and the terms "VRl” and “capsaicin receptor” are used interchangeably herein to refer to rat and/or human receptors of this type, as well as mammalian homologues.
  • VRl vanilloid receptor type 1
  • Capsaicin receptor are used interchangeably herein to refer to rat and/or human receptors of this type, as well as mammalian homologues.
  • the role of VRl in pain sensation has been confirmed using mice lacking this receptor, which exhibit no vanilloid-evoked pain behavior and impaired responses to heat and inflammation.
  • VRl is a nonselective cation channel with a threshold for opening that is lowered in response to elevated temperatures, low pH, and capsaicin receptor agonists.
  • Opening of the capsaicin receptor channel is generally followed by the release of inflammatory peptides from neurons expressing the receptor and other nearby neurons, increasing the pain response.
  • the capsaicin receptor undergoes a rapid desensitization via phosphorylation by cAMP-dependent protein kinase.
  • VRl agonist vanilloid compounds Because of their ability to desensitize nociceptors in peripheral tissues, VRl agonist vanilloid compounds have been used as topical anesthetics. However, agonist application may itself cause burning pain, which limits this therapeutic use. Recently, it has been reported that VRl antagonists, including certain nonvanilloid compounds, are also useful for the treatment of pain (see, e.g., PCT International Application Publication Numbers WO 05/049613, WO 06/100520, WO 06/120481 and WO 06/122200).
  • the present invention provides substituted pyrimidinones of Formula I:
  • Ar is 6- to 10-membered aryl (e.g., phenyl) or a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, (e.g., pyridyl) that is optionally substituted and is preferably substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 - C ⁇ alkynyl, Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl, Ci-C ⁇ hydroxyalkyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy, Ci-C ⁇ haloalkoxy, (C 3 - C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, and mono- or di-(Ci-C 6 alkyl)amino; Ri is: (i) hydrogen, halogen, hydroxy, amino or cyano; or
  • R 2 is:
  • R 3 4- to 7-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from R 7 ; and R 3 is:
  • Ci-C 6 haloalkyl Ci-C 6 alkoxy, Ci-C 6 haloalkoxy, Ci-C 6 alkylthio, Ci-C 6 haloalkylthio or mono- or di-(C]-C 6 alkyl)amino, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from R 7 , phenyl and 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, which phenyl and heteroaryl are substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from R 7 ,
  • R 3 is not unsubstituted benzylthio (i.e., (iii) phenoxy that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from R 7 ; and each R 7 is independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, C)-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, d-C 6 haloalkyl, Ci-C 6 hydroxyalkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, C,-
  • compounds of Formula I are VRl modulators and exhibit a K; of no greater than 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar in a capsaicin receptor binding assay and/or have an EC 50 or IC 50 value of no greater than 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar in an in vitro assay for determination of capsaicin receptor agonist or antagonist activity.
  • such VRl modulators are VRl antagonists and exhibit no detectable agonist activity in an in vitro assay of capsaicin receptor activation
  • compounds provided herein are labeled with a detectable marker (e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated).
  • a detectable marker e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated.
  • the present invention further provides, within other aspects, pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one substituted pyrimidinone in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • methods for reducing calcium conductance of a cellular capsaicin receptor, comprising contacting a cell (e.g., neuronal, such as cells of the central nervous system or peripheral ganglia, urothelial or lung) that expresses a capsaicin receptor with at least one VRl modulator as described herein.
  • a cell e.g., neuronal, such as cells of the central nervous system or peripheral ganglia, urothelial or lung
  • Such contact may occur in vivo or in vitro and is generally performed using a concentration of VRl modulator that is sufficient to alter the binding of vanilloid ligand to VRl in vitro (using the assay provided in Example 5) and/or VRl -mediated signal transduction (using an assay provided in Example 6).
  • Methods are further provided for inhibiting binding of vanilloid ligand to a capsaicin receptor.
  • the inhibition takes place in vitro.
  • Such methods comprise contacting a capsaicin receptor with at least one VRl modulator as described herein, under conditions and in an amount or concentration sufficient to detectably inhibit vanilloid ligand binding to the capsaicin receptor.
  • the capsaicin receptor is in a patient.
  • Such methods comprise contacting cells expressing a capsaicin receptor in a patient with at least one VRl modulator as described herein in an amount or concentration that would be sufficient to detectably inhibit vanilloid ligand binding to cells expressing a cloned capsaicin receptor in vitro.
  • the present invention further provides methods for treating a condition responsive to capsaicin receptor modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one VRl modulator as described herein.
  • methods for treating pain in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from (or at risk for) pain a therapeutically effective amount of at least one VRl modulator as described herein.
  • Methods are further provided for treating itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, menopause symptoms, cough and/or hiccup in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from (or at risk for) one or more of the foregoing conditions a therapeutically effective amount of at least one VRl modulator as described herein.
  • the present invention further provides methods for promoting weight loss in an obese patient, comprising administering to an obese patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one VRl modulator as described herein.
  • Methods are further provided for identifying an agent that binds to capsaicin receptor, comprising: (a) contacting capsaicin receptor with a labeled compound as described herein under conditions that permit binding of the compound to capsaicin receptor, thereby generating bound, labeled compound; (b) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled compound in the absence of test agent; (c) contacting the bound, labeled compound with a test agent; (d) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound labeled compound in the presence of test agent; and (e) detecting a decrease in signal detected in step (d), as compared to the signal detected in step (b).
  • the present invention provides methods for determining the presence or absence of capsaicin receptor in a sample, comprising: (a) contacting a sample with a compound as described herein under conditions that permit binding of the compound to capsaicin receptor; and (b) detecting a signal indicative of a level of the compound bound to capsaicin receptor.
  • the present invention also provides packaged pharmaceutical preparations, comprising: (a) a pharmaceutical composition as described herein in a container; and (b) instructions for using the composition to treat one or more conditions responsive to capsaicin receptor modulation, such as pain, itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, cough, hiccup and/or obesity.
  • the present invention provides methods for preparing the compounds disclosed herein, including the intermediates.
  • the present invention provides substituted pyrimidinones. Such compounds may be used in vitro or in vivo, to modulate capsaicin receptor activity in a variety of contexts.
  • substituted pyrimidinones encompasses all compounds of Formula I, as well as compounds of other Formulas provided herein (including any enantiomers, racemates and stereoisomers) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • substituted pyrimidinones provided herein are isolated so as to be substantially free of residual organic solvent (i.e., any such solvent in the preparation is present in an amount that is at or below the limit set for that solvent by the International Council on Harmonisation of Technical Requirements for Registration of Pharmaceuticals for Human Use (ICH)).
  • a “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” of a compound recited herein is an acid or base salt that is suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings or animals without excessive toxicity or carcinogenicity, and preferably without irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication.
  • Such salts include mineral and organic acid salts of basic residues such as amines, as well as alkali or organic salts of acidic residues such as carboxylic acids.
  • Specific pharmaceutically acceptable anions for use in salt formation include, but are not limited to, acetate, 2-acetoxybenzoate, ascorbate, benzoate, bicarbonate, bromide, calcium edetate, carbonate, chloride, citrate, dihydrochloride, diphosphate, ditartrate, edetate, estolate (ethylsuccinate), formate, fumarate, gluceptate, gluconate, glutamate, glycolate, glycollylarsanilate, hexylresorcinate, hydrabamine, hydrobromide, hydrochloride, hydroiodide, hydroxymaleate, hydroxynaphthoate, iodide, isethionate, lactate, lactobionate, malate, maleate, mandelate, methylbromide, methylnitrate, methylsulfate, mucate, napsylate, nitrate, pamoate, pantothenate, phenylacetate
  • pharmaceutically acceptable cations for use in salt formation include, but are not limited to ammonium, benzathine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, ethylenediamine, meglumine, procaine, and metals such as aluminum, calcium, lithium, magnesium, potassium, sodium and zinc.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base salt can be synthesized from a parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by any conventional chemical method.
  • such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, the use of nonaqueous media, such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, methanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile, is preferred.
  • nonaqueous media such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, methanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile
  • prodrugs of the compounds of the recited Formulas are provided herein.
  • a "prodrug” is a compound that may not fully satisfy the structural requirements of the compounds provided herein, but is modified in vivo, following administration to a patient, to produce a compound a formula provided herein.
  • a prodrug may be an acylated derivative of a compound as provided herein.
  • Prodrugs include compounds wherein hydroxy, amine or sulfhydryl groups are bonded to any group that, when administered to a mammalian subject, cleaves to form a free hydroxy, amino, or sulfhydryl group, respectively.
  • Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, acetate, formate and benzoate derivatives of alcohol and amine functional groups within the compounds provided herein.
  • Prodrugs of the compounds provided herein may be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compounds in such a way that the modifications are cleaved in vivo to yield the parent compounds.
  • alkyl refers to a straight or branched chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon.
  • Alkyl groups include, for example, groups having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms (Ci-C ⁇ alkyl) and from 1 to 4 carbon atoms (Ci-C 4 alkyl), such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-buty ⁇ , pentyl, 2-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, 2-hexyl, 3-hexyl and 3-methylpentyl.
  • a substituent of an alkyl group is specifically indicated.
  • hydroxyalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with at least one hydroxy substituent.
  • Alkylene refers to a divalent alkyl group, as defined above. Ci-C 2 alkylene is methylene or ethylene; C 0 -C 4 alkylene is a single covalent bond or an alkylene group having 1, 2, 3 or carbon atoms; Co-C 2 alkylene is a single covalent bond or an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms.
  • Alkenyl refers to a straight or branched chain alkene group, which comprises at least one unsaturated carbon-carbon double bond.
  • Alkenyl groups include, for example, C 2 - C ⁇ alkenyl, which has from 2 to 6 carbon atoms, such as ethenyl, allyl or isopropenyl.
  • Alkynyl refers to straight or branched chain alkyne groups, which have one or more unsaturated carbon-carbon bonds, at least one of which is a triple bond.
  • Alkynyl groups include, for example, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, which has from 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • a “cycloalkyl” is a group that comprises one or more saturated and/or partially saturated rings in which all ring members are carbon, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, and partially saturated variants of the foregoing, such as cyclohexenyl. Cycloalkyl groups do not comprise an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring. Certain cycloalkyl groups are C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl, in which the cycloalkyl group contains a single ring having from 3 to 7 ring members, all of which are carbon.
  • a "(C 3 - C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl” is a C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl group linked via a single covalent bond or a Ci-C 4 alkylene group.
  • alkoxy is meant an alkyl group as described above attached via an oxygen bridge.
  • Alkoxy groups include Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy and Ci-C 4 alkoxy groups, which have from 1 to 6 or from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • Methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, n-pentoxy, 2-pentoxy, 3-pentoxy, isopentoxy, neopentoxy, hexoxy, 2-hexoxy, 3-hexoxy, and 3-methylpentoxy are representative alkoxy groups.
  • alkylthio refers to an alkyl group as described above attached via a sulfur bridge.
  • Alkanoyl groups have the indicated number of carbon atoms, with the carbon of the keto group being included in the numbered carbon atoms.
  • Alkanoyl groups include, for example, C]-C 6 alkanoyl and Ci-Gjalkanoyl groups, which have from 1 to 6 or from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • Alkyl ether refers to a linear or branched ether substituent (i.e., an alkyl group that is substituted with an alkoxy group). Alkyl ether groups include, for example, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether groups, which have 2 to 6 carbon atoms. A C 2 alkyl ether has the structure -CH 2 -O-CH 3 .
  • Alkylamino refers to a secondary or tertiary amine that has the general structure - NH-alkyl or -N(alkyl)(alkyl), wherein each alkyl is selected independently from alkyl, cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups.
  • groups include, for example, mono- and di- (Ci-C 6 alkyl)amino groups, in which each Ci-C ⁇ alkyl may be the same or different.
  • alkyl as used in the term “alkylamino” differs from the definition of "alkyl” used for all other alkyl-containing groups, in the inclusion of cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups (e.g., (C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl)Co-C 3 alkyl).
  • Alkylsulfonyl refers to groups of the formula -(SO 2 )-alkyl, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment. Alkylsulfonyl groups include, for example, Ci-C 6 alkylsulfonyl groups, which have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • halogen refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
  • haloalkyl is an alkyl group that is substituted with 1 or more independently chosen halogens (e.g., "Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl” groups have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms).
  • haloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, mono-, di- or tri-fluoromethyl; mono-, di- or tri-chloromethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, terra- or penta-fluoroethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta- chloroethyl; and 1,2,2,2-tetrafluoro-l-trifluoromethyl-ethyl.
  • Typical haloalkyl groups are trifluoromethyl and difluoromethyl.
  • haloalkoxy refers to a haloalkyl group as defined above that is linked via an oxygen bridge.
  • haloalkylthio refers to a haloalkyl group as defined above that is linked via a sulfur bridge.
  • Aryl refers to a cyclic moiety (e.g., a monocycle or a fused bicyclic group) in which all ring members are carbon and at least one ring is aromatic.
  • Aryl groups include, for example, phenyl and groups with fused rings such as naphthyl, fluorenyl, indanyl and 1,2,3,4- tetrahydro-naphthyl.
  • a “heterocycle” is a group that comprises at least one heterocyclic ring (i.e., a ring in which one or more ring atoms are heteroatoms independently chosen from O, S and N, with the remaining ring atoms being carbon). Additional rings, if present, may be heterocyclic or carbocyclic. Typically, a heterocyclic ring comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatoms; within certain embodiments each heterocyclic ring has 1 or 2 heteroatoms per ring. Each heterocyclic ring generally contains from 3 to 8 ring members (rings having from 4 or 5 to 7 ring members are recited in certain embodiments).
  • heterocycles comprise a sulfur atom as a ring member; in certain embodiments, the sulfur atom is oxidized to SO or SO 2 .
  • Heterocycles may be optionally substituted with a variety of substituents, as indicated.
  • a heterocycle may be a heterocycloalkyl group (i.e., each ring is saturated or partially saturated) or a heteroaryl group (i.e., an aromatic group in which at least one aromatic ring comprises at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S), and may be linked via any ring atom, provided that a stable compound results.
  • a "(4- to 7-membered heterocycle)Co-C 4 alkyl” is a heterocyclic ring containing from 4 to 7 ring members that is linked via a single covalent bond (Co) or a Ci-C 4 alkylene moiety.
  • Representative 4- to 7- membered heterocycles include, for example, heterocycloalkyl moieties such as piperazine, piperidine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, pyrrolidine and imidazolidine, as well as 5- and 6- membered heteroaryls such as imidazole, furan, furazan, isothiazole, isoxazole, oxadiazole, oxazole, pyrazine, pyrazole, pyridazine, pyridine, pyrimidine, tetrazole, thiazole and thiophene.
  • heterocycloalkyl moieties such as piperazine, piperidine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, pyrrolidine and imidazolidine
  • 5- and 6- membered heteroaryls such as imidazole, furan, furazan, isothiazole, isoxazole, oxadiazole, oxazole, pyrazin
  • a “substituent,” as used herein, refers to a molecular moiety that is covalently bonded to an atom within a molecule of interest.
  • a ring substituent may be a moiety such as a halogen, alkyl group, haloalkyl group or other group that is covalently bonded to an atom (preferably a carbon or nitrogen atom) that is a ring member.
  • Substituents of aromatic groups are generally covalently bonded to a ring carbon atom.
  • substitution refers to replacing a hydrogen atom in a molecular structure with a substituent, such that the valence on the designated atom is not exceeded, and such that a chemically stable compound (i.e., a compound that can be isolated, characterized, and tested for biological activity) results from the substitution.
  • Groups that are "optionally substituted” are unsubstituted or are substituted by other than hydrogen at one or more available positions, typically 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 positions, by one or more suitable groups (which may be the same or different).
  • Optional substitution is also indicated by the phrase "substituted with from 0 to X substituents," where X is the maximum number of possible substituents.
  • optionally substituted groups are substituted with from 0 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents ⁇ i.e., are unsubstituted or substituted with up to the recited maximum number of substituents).
  • Other optionally substituted groups are substituted with at least one substituent ⁇ e.g., substituted with from 1 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents).
  • VRl and “capsaicin receptor” are used interchangeably herein to refer to a type 1 vanilloid receptor. Unless otherwise specified, these terms encompass both rat and human VRl receptors ⁇ e.g., GenBank Accession Numbers AF327067, AJ277028 and NM O 18727; sequences of certain human VRl cDNAs and the encoded amino acid sequences are provided in U.S. Patent No. 6,482,611), as well as homologies thereof found in other species.
  • a “VRl modulator,” also referred to herein as a “modulator,” is a compound that modulates VRl activation and/or VRl -mediated signal transduction.
  • VRl modulators specifically provided herein are compounds of Formula I and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and esters thereof. Certain preferred VRl modulators are not vanilloids.
  • a VRl modulator may be a VRl agonist or antagonist.
  • Certain modulators bind to VRl with a K 1 that is less than 1 micromolar, preferably less than 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar.
  • a representative assay for determining Kj at VRl is provided in
  • a modulator is considered an "antagonist" if it detectably inhibits vanilloid ligand binding to VRl and/or VRl -mediated signal transduction (using, for example, the representative assay provided in Example 6); in general, such an antagonist inhibits VRl activation with a IC 50 value of less than 1 micromolar, preferably less than 500 nanomolar, and more preferably less than 100 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar within the assay provided in Example 6.
  • VRl antagonists include neutral antagonists and inverse agonists.
  • An "inverse agonist" of VRl is a compound that reduces the activity of VRl below its basal activity level in the absence of added vanilloid ligand. Inverse agonists of VRl may also inhibit the activity of vanilloid ligand at VRl and/or binding of vanilloid ligand to VRl.
  • the basal activity of VRl, as well as the reduction in VRl activity due to the presence of VRl antagonist, may be determined from a calcium mobilization assay, such as the assay of Example 6.
  • a "neutral antagonist" of VRl is a compound that inhibits the activity of vanilloid ligand at VRl, but does not significantly change the basal activity of the receptor (i.e., within a calcium mobilization assay as described in Example 6 performed in the absence of vanilloid ligand, VRl activity is reduced by no more than 10%, preferably by no more than 5%, and more preferably by no more than 2%; most preferably, there is no detectable reduction in activity).
  • Neutral antagonists of VRl may inhibit the binding of vanilloid ligand to VRl .
  • Capsaicin receptor agonist or “VRl agonist” is a compound that elevates the activity of the receptor above the basal activity level of the receptor (i.e., enhances VRl activation and/or VRl -mediated signal transduction). Capsaicin receptor agonist activity may be identified using the representative assay provided in Example 6. In general, such an agonist has an EC 50 value of less than 1 micromolar, preferably less than 500 nanomolar, and more preferably less than 100 nanomolar or 10 nanomolar within the assay provided in Example 6.
  • a “vanilloid” is any compound that comprises a phenyl ring with two oxygen atoms bound to adjacent ring carbon atoms (one of which carbon atom is located para to the point of attachment of a third moiety that is bound to the phenyl ring).
  • Capsaicin is a representative vanilloid.
  • a “vanilloid ligand” is a vanilloid that binds to VRl with a Kj (determined as described herein) that is no greater than 10 ⁇ M.
  • Vanilloid ligand agonists include capsaicin, olvanil, N-arachidonoyl-dopamine and resiniferatoxin (RTX).
  • Vanilloid ligand antagonists include capsazepine and iodo-resiniferatoxin.
  • a "therapeutically effective amount” is an amount that, upon administration to a patient, results in a discernible patient benefit (e.g., provides detectable relief from at least one condition being treated). Such relief may be detected using any appropriate criteria, including alleviation of one or more symptoms such as pain.
  • a therapeutically effective amount or dose generally results in a concentration of compound in a body fluid (such as blood, plasma, serum, CSF, synovial fluid, lymph, cellular interstitial fluid, tears or urine) that is sufficient to alter the binding of vanilloid ligand to VRl in vitro (using the assay provided in Example 5) and/or VRl -mediated signal transduction (using an assay provided in Example 6). It will be apparent that the discernible patient benefit may be apparent after administration of a single dose, or may become apparent following repeated administration of the therapeutically effective dose according to a predetermined regimen, depending upon the indication for which the compound is administered.
  • a body fluid such as blood, plasma, serum, CSF, synovial fluid, lymph, cellular interstitial fluid, tears or urine
  • statically significant results varying from control at the p ⁇ 0.1 level of significance as measured using a standard parametric assay of statistical significance such as a student's T test.
  • a "patient” is any individual treated with a compound provided herein. Patients include humans, as well as other animals such as companion animals (e.g., dogs and cats) and livestock. Patients may be experiencing one or more symptoms of a condition responsive to capsaicin receptor modulation (e.g., pain, exposure to vanilloid ligand, itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, respiratory disorders, cough and/or hiccup), or may be free of such symptom(s) (i.e., treatment may be prophylactic in a patient considered at risk for the development of such symptoms).
  • capsaicin receptor modulation e.g., pain, exposure to vanilloid ligand, itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, respiratory disorders, cough and/or hiccup
  • treatment may be prophylactic in a patient considered at risk for the development of such symptoms.
  • the present invention provides substituted pyrimidinones of Formula I.
  • such compounds are VRl modulators that may be used in a variety of contexts, including in the treatment of pain (e.g., neuropathic or peripheral nerve-mediated pain); exposure to capsaicin; exposure to acid, heat, light, tear gas, air pollutants (such as, for example, tobacco smoke), infectious agents (including viruses, bacteria and yeast), pepper spray or related agents; respiratory conditions such as asthma or chronic obstructive pulmonary disease; itch; urinary incontinence or overactive bladder; cough or hiccup; menopause symptoms and/or obesity.
  • Ar is, in certain embodiments, phenyl or a 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted as described above.
  • Ar is phenyl or pyridyl, each of which is substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, nitro and Ci-C ⁇ alkyl.
  • the variable Ri in certain substituted pyrimidinones, is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, Q-
  • Ri is hydrogen, cyano, halogen, Ci-C 4 alkyl or C]-C4alkanoyl. In further such compounds, Ri is bromo, chloro, fluoro, iodo, methyl or ethyl.
  • R 2 is Ci-C ⁇ alkyl; Q-Cohydroxyalkyl, Ci-C ⁇ aminoalkyl, C 2 - C 6 alkyl ether or Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl; or a group of the formula: wherein R 5 and R 6 are independently chosen from hydrogen, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, (C 3 - C 7 cycloalkyl)Co-C 4 alkyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkanoyl, and Ci-C 6 alkylsulfonyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from R 7 , such that at least one of R 5 and
  • R 6 is not hydrogen; or R 5 and R ⁇ are taken together to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from
  • R 3 is C 5 -C 7 cycloalkyl that is substituted with from 1 to 2 substituents independently chosen from C)-C 4 alkyl, halogen and Ci-C 4 haloalkyl.
  • Representative R 3 groups include, for example:
  • w rein n is an interger rangin.g from 0 to.5. ,.,. ,,,. d i3.
  • A is CH or N
  • R 4 represents from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, Ci-C ⁇ alkyl, Q-Qhaloalkyl, Ci-C 6 hydroxyalkyl, Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy and Ci- C ⁇ haloalkoxy; and
  • R x is Ci-C 4 alkyl or Ci-Qhaloalkyl.
  • Formula III specifically recites the cis isomer.
  • Representative R x moieties include, for example, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, t-butyl, difluoromethyl and trifluoromethyl.
  • Representative compounds provided herein include, but are not limited to, those specifically described in Examples 2 and 3. It will be apparent that the specific compounds recited herein are representative only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention. Further, as noted above, all compounds of the present invention may be present as a free acid or base, or as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt. In addition, other forms such as hydrates and prodrugs of such compounds are specifically contemplated by the present invention.
  • substituted pyrimidinones provided herein detectably alter (modulate) VRl activity, as determined using an in vitro VRl functional assay such as a calcium mobilization assay.
  • a VRl ligand binding assay may be used as an initial screen for such activity.
  • References herein to a "VRl ligand binding assay" are intended to refer to a standard in vitro receptor binding assay such as that provided in
  • Example 5 a “calcium mobilization assay” (also referred to herein as a “signal transduction assay”) may be performed as described in Example 6. Briefly, to assess binding to VRl, a competition assay may be performed in which a VRl preparation is incubated with labeled ⁇ e.g., 125 I or 3 H) compound that binds to VRl ⁇ e.g., a capsaicin receptor agonist such as RTX) and unlabeled test compound.
  • the VRl used is preferably mammalian VRl, more preferably human or rat VRl .
  • the receptor may be recombinantly expressed or naturally expressed.
  • the VRl preparation may be, for example, a membrane preparation from HEK293 or CHO cells that recombinantly express human VRl .
  • Incubation with a compound that detectably modulates vanilloid ligand binding to VRl results in a decrease or increase in the amount of label bound to the VRl preparation, relative to the amount of label bound in the absence of the compound. This decrease or increase may be used to determine the Kj at VRl as described herein.
  • compounds that decrease the amount of label bound to the VRl preparation within such an assay are preferred.
  • Certain VRl modulators provided herein detectably modulate VRl activity at nanomolar (i.e., submicromolar) concentrations, at subnanomolar concentrations, or at concentrations below 100 picomolar, 20 picomolar, 10 picomolar or 5 picomolar.
  • IC 50 values for such compounds may be determined using a standard in vitro VRl -mediated calcium mobilization assay, as provided in Example 6. Briefly, cells expressing capsaicin receptor are contacted with a compound of interest and with an indicator of intracellular calcium concentration ⁇ e.g., a membrane permeable calcium sensitivity dye such as Fluo-3 or Fura-2 (Molecular Probes, Eugene, OR), each of which produce a fluorescent signal when bound to Ca +* ). Such contact is preferably carried out by one or more incubations of the cells in buffer or culture medium comprising either or both of the compound and the indicator in solution.
  • an indicator of intracellular calcium concentration e.g., a membrane permeable calcium sensitivity dye such as Fluo-3 or Fura-2 (Molecular Probes, Eugene, OR)
  • Such contact is preferably carried out by one or more incubations of the cells in buffer or culture medium comprising either or both of the compound and the indicator in solution.
  • a vanilloid receptor agonist e.g., capsaicin, RTX or olvanil
  • a fluorescence response is measured.
  • agonist-contacted cells are contacted with a compound that is a VRl antagonist the fluorescence response is generally reduced by at least 20%, preferably at least 50% and more preferably at least 80%, as compared to cells that are contacted with the agonist in the absence of test compound.
  • the IC 50 for VRl antagonists provided herein is preferably less than 1 micromolar, less than 100 nM, less than 10 nM or less than 1 nM.
  • VRl antagonists provided herein exhibit no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of capsaicin receptor agonism at a concentration of compound equal to the IC 50 .
  • Certain such antagonists exhibit no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of capsaicin receptor agonism at a concentration of compound that is 100- fold higher than the IC 50 .
  • compounds that are capsaicin receptor agonists are preferred.
  • Capsaicin receptor agonist activity may generally be determined as described in Example 6.
  • the fluorescence response is generally increased by an amount that is at least 30% of the increase observed when cells are contacted with 100 nM capsaicin.
  • the EC 50 for VRl agonists provided herein is preferably less than 1 micromolar, less than 100 nM or less than 10 nM.
  • VRl modulating activity may also, or alternatively, be assessed using a cultured dorsal root ganglion assay as provided in Example 7 and/or an in vivo pain relief assay as provided in Example 8.
  • VRl modulators provided herein preferably have a statistically significant specific effect on VRl activity within one or more functional assays provided herein.
  • VRl modulators provided herein do not substantially modulate ligand binding to other cell surface receptors, such as EGF receptor tyrosine kinase or the nicotinic acetylcholine receptor.
  • such modulators do not substantially inhibit activity of a cell surface receptor such as the human epidermal growth factor (EGF) receptor tyrosine kinase or the nicotinic acetylcholine receptor (e.g., the IC 50 or IC 40 at such a receptor is preferably greater than 1 micromolar, and most preferably greater than 10 micromolar).
  • EGF human epidermal growth factor
  • a modulator does not detectably inhibit EGF receptor activity or nicotinic acetylcholine receptor activity at a concentration of 0.5 micromolar, 1 micromolar or more preferably 10 micromolar.
  • Assays for determining cell surface receptor activity are commercially available, and include the tyrosine kinase assay kits available from Panvera (Madison, WI).
  • preferred VRl modulators are non-sedating.
  • a dose of VRl modulator that is twice the minimum dose sufficient to provide analgesia in an animal model for determining pain relief causes only transient (i.e., lasting for no more than 1 A the time that pain relief lasts) or preferably no statistically significant sedation in an animal model assay of sedation (using the method described by Fitzgerald et al. (1988) Toxicology 49(2-3):433-9).
  • a dose that is five times the minimum dose sufficient to provide analgesia does not produce statistically significant sedation.
  • a VRl modulator provided herein does not produce sedation at intravenous doses of less than 25 mg/kg (preferably less than 10 mg/kg) or at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg (preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg).
  • compounds provided herein may be evaluated for certain pharmacological properties including, but not limited to, oral bioavailability (preferred compounds are orally bioavailable to an extent allowing for therapeutically effective concentrations of the compound to be achieved at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg, preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg, even more preferably less than 10 mg/kg, still more preferably less than 1 mg/kg and most preferably less than 0.1 mg/kg), toxicity (a preferred compound is nontoxic when a therapeutically effective amount is administered to a subject), side effects (a preferred compound produces side effects comparable to placebo when a therapeutically effective amount of the compound is administered to a subject), serum protein binding and in vitro and in vivo half-life (a preferred compound exhibits an in vivo half-life allowing for Q.I.
  • D. dosing preferably T.I. D. dosing, more preferably B.I.D. dosing, and most preferably once-a-day dosing).
  • differential penetration of the blood brain barrier may be desirable for VRl modulators used to treat pain by modulating CNS VRl activity such that total daily oral doses as described above provide such modulation to a therapeutically effective extent, while low brain levels of VRl modulators used to treat peripheral nerve mediated pain may be preferred (i.e., such doses do not provide brain (e.g., CSF) levels of the compound sufficient to significantly modulate VRl activity).
  • Routine assays that are well known in the art may be used to assess these properties, and identify superior compounds for a particular use.
  • assays used to predict bioavailability include transport across human intestinal cell monolayers, including Caco-2 cell monolayers.
  • Penetration of the blood brain barrier of a compound in humans may be predicted from the brain levels of the compound in laboratory animals given the compound (e.g., intravenously).
  • Serum protein binding may be predicted from albumin binding assays.
  • nontoxic shall be understood in a relative sense and is intended to refer to any substance that has been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration (“FDA”) for administration to mammals (preferably humans) or, in keeping with established criteria, is susceptible to approval by the FDA for administration to mammals (preferably humans).
  • FDA United States Food and Drug Administration
  • a highly preferred nontoxic compound generally satisfies one or more of the following criteria: (1) does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production; (2) does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals; (3) does not cause substantial liver enlargement, or (4) does not cause substantial release of liver enzymes.
  • a compound that does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production is a compound that satisfies the criteria set forth in Example 8 of U.S. Patent Application Publication Number 2005/0070547.
  • cells treated as described therein with 100 ⁇ M of such a compound exhibit ATP levels that are at least 50% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
  • such cells exhibit ATP levels that are at least 80% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
  • a compound that does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals is a compound that does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals (as determined by electrocardiography) in guinea pigs, minipigs or dogs upon administration of a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC 50 for the compound.
  • a dose of 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals.
  • a compound does not cause substantial liver enlargement if daily treatment of laboratory rodents (e.g., mice or rats) for 5-10 days with a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC 50 for the compound results in an increase in liver to body weight ratio that is no more than 100% over matched controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not cause liver enlargement of more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. If non-rodent mammals (e.g., dogs) are used, such doses should not result in an increase of liver to body weight ratio of more than 50%, preferably not more than 25%, and more preferably not more than 10% over matched untreated controls. Preferred doses within such assays include 0.01, 0.05.
  • a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if administration of twice the minimum dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC 50 at VRl for the compound does not elevate serum levels of ALT, LDH or AST in laboratory animals (e.g., rodents) by more than 100% over matched mock-treated controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not elevate such serum levels by more than 75% or 50% over matched controls.
  • a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if, in an in vitro hepatocyte assay, concentrations (in culture media or other such solutions that are contacted and incubated with hepatocytes in vitro) that are equal to the EC 50 or IC 50 for the compound do not cause detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels seen in media from matched mock-treated control cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, there is no detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels when such compound concentrations are five-fold, and preferably ten-fold the EC50 or IC5 0 for the compound.
  • certain preferred compounds do not inhibit or induce microsomal cytochrome P450 enzyme activities, such as CYPl A2 activity, CYP2A6 activity, CYP2C9 activity, CYP2C19 activity, CYP2D6 activity, CYP2E1 activity or CYP3A4 activity at a concentration equal to the EC50 or IC 50 at VRl for the compound.
  • microsomal cytochrome P450 enzyme activities such as CYPl A2 activity, CYP2A6 activity, CYP2C9 activity, CYP2C19 activity, CYP2D6 activity, CYP2E1 activity or CYP3A4 activity at a concentration equal to the EC50 or IC 50 at VRl for the compound.
  • Certain preferred compounds are not clastogenic (e.g., as determined using a mouse erythrocyte precursor cell micronucleus assay, an Ames micronucleus assay, a spiral micronucleus assay or the like) at a concentration equal the EC 50 or IC 50 for the compound. In other embodiments, certain preferred compounds do not induce sister chromatid exchange
  • VRl modulators provided herein may be isotopically-labeled or radiolabeled.
  • compounds may have one or more atoms replaced by an atom of the same element having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature.
  • isotopes that can be present in the compounds provided herein include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2 H, 3 H, 11 C, 13 C, 14 C,
  • substitution with heavy isotopes such as deuterium can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances.
  • Substituted pyrimidinones may generally be prepared using standard synthetic methods. Starting materials are commercially available from suppliers such as Sigma-Aldrich
  • a compound provided herein may contain one or more asymmetric carbon atoms, so that the compound can exist in different stereoisomeric forms.
  • Such forms can be, for example, racemates or optically active forms. As noted above, all stereoisomers are encompassed by the present invention. Nonetheless, it may be desirable to obtain single enantiomers ⁇ i.e., optically active forms).
  • Standard methods for preparing single enantiomers include asymmetric synthesis and resolution of the racemates. Resolution of the racemates can be accomplished, for example, by conventional methods such as crystallization in the presence of a resolving agent, or chromatography using, for example a chiral HPLC column.
  • Compounds may be radiolabeled by carrying out their synthesis using precursors comprising at least one atom that is a radioisotope.
  • Each radioisotope is preferably carbon (e.g., 14 C), hydrogen (e.g., 3 H), sulfur (e.g., 35 S), or iodine (e.g., 125 I).
  • Tritium labeled compounds may also be prepared catalytically via platinum-catalyzed exchange in tritiated acetic acid, acid-catalyzed exchange in tritiated trifluoroacetic acid, or heterogeneous- catalyzed exchange with tritium gas using the compound as substrate.
  • certain precursors may be subjected to tritium-halogen exchange with tritium gas, tritium gas reduction of unsaturated bonds, or reduction using sodium borotritide, as appropriate.
  • Preparation of radiolabeled compounds may be conveniently performed by a radioisotope supplier specializing in custom synthesis of radiolabeled probe compounds.
  • compositions comprising one or more compounds provided herein, together with at least one physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may comprise, for example, one or more of water, buffers (e.g., neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline), ethanol, mineral oil, vegetable oil, dimethylsulfoxide, carbohydrates (e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose or dextrans), mannitol, proteins, adjuvants, polypeptides or amino acids such as glycine, antioxidants, chelating agents such as EDTA or glutathione and/or preservatives.
  • other active ingredients may (but need not) be included in the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein.
  • compositions may be formulated for any appropriate manner of administration, including, for example, topical, oral, nasal, rectal or parenteral administration.
  • parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intradermal, intravascular (e.g., intravenous), intramuscular, spinal, intracranial, intrathecal and intraperitoneal injection, as well as any similar injection or infusion technique.
  • compositions suitable for oral use are preferred. Such compositions include, for example, tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oily suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsion, hard or soft capsules, or syrups or elixirs.
  • pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated as a lyophilizate.
  • Formulation for topical administration may be preferred for certain conditions (e.g., in the treatment of skin conditions such as burns or itch).
  • Formulation for direct administration into the bladder may be preferred for treatment of urinary incontinence and overactive bladder.
  • Compositions intended for oral use may further comprise one or more components such as sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and/or preserving agents in order to provide appealing and palatable preparations.
  • Tablets contain the active ingredient in admixture with physiologically acceptable excipients that are suitable for the manufacture of tablets.
  • excipients include, for example, inert diluents (e.g., calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate), granulating and disintegrating agents (e.g., corn starch or alginic acid), binding agents (e.g., starch, gelatin or acacia) and lubricating agents (e.g., magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc). Tablets may be formed using standard techniques, including dry granulation, direct compression and wet granulation. The tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques.
  • inert diluents e.g., calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate
  • granulating and disintegrating agents e.g., corn starch or alginic acid
  • binding agents e.g., starch, gelatin or acacia
  • lubricating agents e.g.
  • Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent (e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin), or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium (e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil).
  • an inert solid diluent e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin
  • an oil medium e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil
  • Aqueous suspensions contain the active material(s) in admixture with suitable excipients, such as suspending agents (e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydropropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia); and dispersing or wetting agents (e.g., naturally-occurring phosphatides such as lecithin, condensation products of an alkylene oxide with fatty acids such as polyoxyethylene stearate, condensation products of ethylene oxide with long chain aliphatic alcohols such as heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol, condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and a hexitol such as polyoxyethylene sorbitol monooleate, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides such as polyethylene sorbitan monooleate).
  • suspending agents e.g., sodium carb
  • Aqueous suspensions may also comprise one or more preservatives, such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents, and/or one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
  • Oily suspensions may be formulated by suspending the active ingredient(s) in a vegetable oil (e.g., arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil) or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin.
  • the oily suspensions may contain a thickening agent such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol. Sweetening agents such as those set forth above, and/or flavoring agents may be added to provide palatable oral preparations.
  • Such suspensions may be preserved by the addition of an anti-oxidant such as ascorbic acid.
  • Dispersible powders and granules suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, a suspending agent and one or more preservatives.
  • a dispersing or wetting agent e.g., a suspending agent
  • Suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents are exemplified by those already mentioned above. Additional excipients, such as sweetening, flavoring and coloring agents, may also be present.
  • compositions may also be formulated as oil-in-water emulsions.
  • the oily phase may be a vegetable oil ⁇ e.g., olive oil or arachis oil), a mineral oil ⁇ e.g., liquid paraffin) or a mixture thereof.
  • Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums ⁇ e.g., gum acacia or gum tragacanth), naturally-occurring phosphatides ⁇ e.g., soy bean lecithin, and esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol), anhydrides ⁇ e.g., sorbitan monoleate) and condensation products of partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol with ethylene oxide ⁇ e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monoleate).
  • An emulsion may also comprise one or more sweetening and/or flavoring agents.
  • Syrups and elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, such as glycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations may also comprise one or more demulcents, preservatives, flavoring agents and/or coloring agents.
  • Formulations for topical administration typically comprise a topical vehicle combined with active agent(s), with or without additional optional components. Suitable topical vehicles and additional components are well known in the art, and it will be apparent that the choice of a vehicle will depend on the particular physical form and mode of delivery.
  • Topical vehicles include water; organic solvents such as alcohols ⁇ e.g., ethanol or isopropyl alcohol) or glycerin; glycols ⁇ e.g., butylene, isoprene or propylene glycol); aliphatic alcohols ⁇ e.g., lanolin); mixtures of water and organic solvents and mixtures of organic solvents such as alcohol and glycerin; lipid-based materials such as fatty acids, acylglycerols (including oils, such as mineral oil, and fats of natural or synthetic origin), phosphoglycerides, sphingolipids and waxes; protein-based materials such as collagen and gelatin; silicone-based materials (both non-volatile and volatile); and hydrocarbon-based materials such as microsponges and polymer matrices.
  • organic solvents such as alcohols ⁇ e.g., ethanol or isopropyl alcohol) or glycerin
  • glycols ⁇ e.g., butylene, is
  • a composition may further include one or more components adapted to improve the stability or effectiveness of the applied formulation, such as stabilizing agents, suspending agents, emulsifying agents, viscosity adjusters, gelling agents, preservatives, antioxidants, skin penetration enhancers, moisturizers and sustained release materials.
  • stabilizing agents such as hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nanoparticles or nanocapsules.
  • a topical formulation may be prepared in any of a variety of physical forms including, for example, solids, pastes, creams, foams, lotions, gels, powders, aqueous liquids and emulsions.
  • the physical appearance and viscosity of such pharmaceutically acceptable forms can be governed by the presence and amount of emulsifier(s) and viscosity adjusters) present in the formulation.
  • Solids are generally firm and non-pourable and commonly are formulated as bars or sticks, or in particulate form; solids can be opaque or transparent, and optionally can contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Creams and lotions are often similar to one another, differing mainly in their viscosity; both lotions and creams may be opaque, translucent or clear and often contain emulsifiers, solvents, and viscosity adjusting agents, as well as moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Gels can be prepared with a range of viscosities, from thick or high viscosity to thin or low viscosity.
  • These formulations may also contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Liquids are thinner than creams, lotions, or gels and often do not contain emulsifiers.
  • Liquid topical products often contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Suitable emulsifiers for use in topical formulations include, but are not limited to, ionic emulsifiers, cetearyl alcohol, non-ionic emulsifiers like polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, PEG-40 stearate, ceteareth-12, ceteareth-20, ceteareth-30, ceteareth alcohol, PEG-100 stearate and glyceryl stearate.
  • Suitable viscosity adjusting agents include, but are not limited to, protective colloids or non-ionic gums such as hydroxyethylcellulose, xanthan gum, magnesium aluminum silicate, silica, microcrystalline wax, beeswax, paraffin, and cetyl palmitate.
  • a gel composition may be formed by the addition of a gelling agent such as chitosan, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, polyquaterniums, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carbomer or ammoniated glycyrrhizinate.
  • a gelling agent such as chitosan, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, polyquaterniums, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carbomer or ammoniated glycyrrhizinate.
  • Suitable surfactants include, but are not limited to, nonionic, amphoteric, ionic and anionic surfactants.
  • dimethicone copolyol polysorbate 20, polysorbate 40, polysorbate 60, polysorbate 80, lauramide DEA, cocamide DEA, and cocamide MEA, oleyl betaine, cocamidopropyl phosphatidyl PG- dimonium chloride, and ammonium laureth sulfate may be used within topical formulations.
  • Suitable preservatives include, but are not limited to, antimicrobials such as methylparaben, propylparaben, sorbic acid, benzoic acid, and formaldehyde, as well as physical stabilizers and antioxidants such as vitamin E, sodium ascorbate/ascorbic acid and propyl gallate.
  • Suitable moisturizers include, but are not limited to, lactic acid and other hydroxy acids and their salts, glycerin, propylene glycol, and butylene glycol.
  • Suitable emollients include lanolin alcohol, lanolin, lanolin derivatives, cholesterol, petrolatum, isostearyl neopentanoate and mineral oils.
  • Suitable fragrances and colors include, but are not limited to, FD&C Red No. 40 and FD&C Yellow No. 5.
  • Suitable additional ingredients include, but are not limited to, abrasives, absorbents, anti-caking agents, anti-foaming agents, anti-static agents, astringents (e.g., witch hazel, alcohol and herbal extracts such as chamomile extract), binders/excipients, -buffering agents, chelating agents, film forming agents, conditioning agents, propellants, opacifying agents, pH adjusters and protectants.
  • An example of a suitable topical vehicle for formulation of a gel is: hydroxypropylcellulose (2.1%); 70/30 isopropyl alcohol/water (90.9%); propylene glycol (5.1%); and Polysorbate 80 (1.9%).
  • An example of a suitable topical vehicle for formulation as a foam is: cetyl alcohol (1.1%); stearyl alcohol (0.5%; Quaternium 52 (1.0%); propylene glycol (2.0%); Ethanol 95 PGF3 (61.05%); deionized water (30.05%); P75 hydrocarbon propellant (4.30%). All percents are by weight.
  • Typical modes of delivery for topical compositions include application using the fingers; application using a physical applicator such as a cloth, tissue, swab, stick or brush; spraying (including mist, aerosol or foam spraying); dropper application; sprinkling; soaking; and rinsing.
  • a pharmaceutical composition may be prepared as a sterile injectible aqueous or oleaginous suspension.
  • the compound(s) provided herein, depending on the vehicle and concentration used, can either be suspended or dissolved in the vehicle.
  • Such a composition may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing, wetting agents and/or suspending agents such as those mentioned above.
  • suitable dispersing, wetting agents and/or suspending agents such as those mentioned above.
  • the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, 1,3-butanediol, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • sterile, fixed oils may be employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil may be employed, including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectible compositions, and adjuvants such as local anesthetics, preservatives and/or buffering agents can be dissolved in the vehicle.
  • compositions may also be formulated as suppositories (e.g., for rectal administration).
  • Such compositions can be prepared by mixing the drug with a suitable non- irritating excipient that is solid at ordinary temperatures but liquid at the rectal temperature and will therefore melt in the rectum to release the drug.
  • suitable excipients include, for example, cocoa butter and polyethylene glycols.
  • compositions for inhalation typically can be provided in the form of a solution, suspension or emulsion that can be administered as a dry powder or in the form of an aerosol using a conventional propellant (e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane or trichlorofluoromethane).
  • a conventional propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane or trichlorofluoromethane.
  • compositions may be formulated for release at a pre-determined rate.
  • Instantaneous release may be achieved, for example, via sublingual administration (i.e., administration by mouth in such a way that the active ingredient(s) are rapidly absorbed via the blood vessels under the tongue rather than via the digestive tract).
  • Controlled release formulations i.e., formulations such as a capsule, tablet or coated tablet that slows and/or delays release of active ingredient(s) following administration
  • a controlled release formulation comprises a matrix and/or coating that delays disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract (or implantation site) and thereby provides a delayed action or a sustained action over a longer period.
  • One type of controlled- release formulation is a sustained-release formulation, in which at least one active ingredient is continuously released over a period of time at a constant rate.
  • the therapeutic agent is released at such a rate that blood (e.g., plasma) concentrations are maintained within the therapeutic range, but below toxic levels, over a period of time that is at least 4 hours, preferably at least 8 hours, and more preferably at least 12 hours.
  • Such formulations may generally be prepared using well known technology and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at the desired target site.
  • Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable; preferably the formulation provides a relatively constant level of modulator release.
  • the amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the site of implantation, the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
  • Controlled release may be achieved by combining the active ingredient(s) with a matrix material that itself alters release rate and/or through the use of a controlled-release coating.
  • the release rate can be varied using methods well known in the art, including (a) varying the thickness or composition of coating, (b) altering the amount or manner of addition of plasticizer in a coating, (c) including additional ingredients, such as release-modifying agents, (d) altering the composition, particle size or particle shape of the matrix, and (e) providing one or more passageways through the coating.
  • the amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the method of administration (e.g., the site of implantation), the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
  • the matrix material which itself may or may not serve a controlled-release function, is generally any material that supports the active ingredient(s).
  • a time delay material such as glyceryl monosterate or glyceryl distearate may be employed.
  • Active ingredient(s) may be combined with matrix material prior to formation of the dosage form (e.g., a tablet).
  • active ingredient(s) may be coated on the surface of a particle, granule, sphere, microsphere, bead or pellet that comprises the matrix material. Such coating may be achieved by conventional means, such as by dissolving the active ingredient(s) in water or other suitable solvent and spraying.
  • additional ingredients are added prior to coating (e.g., to assist binding of the active ingredient(s) to the matrix material or to color the solution).
  • the matrix may then be coated with a barrier agent prior to application of controlled-release coating. Multiple coated matrix units may, if desired, be encapsulated to generate the final dosage form.
  • a controlled release is achieved through the use of a controlled release coating (i.e., a coating that permits release of active ingredient(s) at a controlled rate in aqueous medium).
  • the controlled release coating should be a strong, continuous film that is smooth, capable of supporting pigments and other additives, non-toxic, inert and tack-free.
  • Coatings that regulate release of the modulator include pH-independent coatings, pH-dependent coatings (which may be used to release modulator in the stomach) and enteric coatings (which allow the formulation to pass intact through the stomach and into the small intestine, where the coating dissolves and the contents are absorbed by the body).
  • pH dependent coatings include, for example, shellac, cellulose acetate phthalate, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate, methacrylic acid ester copolymers and zein.
  • the coating is a hydrophobic material, preferably used in an amount effective to slow the hydration of the gelling agent following administration.
  • Suitable hydrophobic materials include alkyl celluloses (e.g., ethylcellulose or carboxymethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, acrylic polymers (e.g., poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxy ethyl methacrylates, cyanoethyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid alkamide copolymer, poly(methyl methacrylate), polyacrylamide, ammonio methacrylate copolymers, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly(methacrylic acid anhydride) and glycidyl methacrylate copolymers) and mixtures of the foregoing.
  • Representative aqueous dispersions of ethylcellulose include, for example, AQUACOAT® (FMC Corp., Philadelphia, PA) and SURELEASE® (Colorcon, Inc., West Point, PA), both of which can be applied to the substrate according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Representative acrylic polymers include, for example, the various EUDRAGIT® (Rohm America, Piscataway, NJ) polymers, which may be used singly or in combination depending on the desired release profile, according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Suitable plasticizers for alkyl celluloses include, for example, dibutyl sebacate, diethyl phthalate, triethyl citrate, tributyl citrate and triacetin.
  • Suitable plasticizers for acrylic polymers include, for example, citric acid esters such as triethyl citrate and tributyl citrate, dibutyl phthalate, polyethylene glycols, propylene glycol, diethyl phthalate, castor oil and triacetin.
  • Controlled-release coatings are generally applied using conventional techniques, such as by spraying in the form of an aqueous dispersion.
  • the coating may comprise pores or channels or to facilitate release of active ingredient. Pores and channels may be generated by well known methods, including the addition of organic or inorganic material that is dissolved, extracted or leached from the coating in the environment of use.
  • pore-forming materials include hydrophilic polymers, such as hydroxyalkylcelluloses (e.g., hydroxypropylmethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, synthetic water-soluble polymers (e.g., polyvinylpyrrolidone, cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone and polyethylene oxide), water- soluble polydextrose, saccharides and polysaccharides and alkali metal salts.
  • a controlled release coating may include one or more orifices, which may be formed my methods such as those described in US Patent Nos. 3,845,770; 4,034,758; 4,077,407; 4,088,864; 4,783,337 and 5,071,607. Controlled-release may also be achieved through the use of transdermal patches, using conventional technology (see, e.g., US Patent No. 4,668,232).
  • controlled release formulations may be found, for example, in US Patent Nos. 4,572,833; 4,587,117; 4,606,909; 4,610,870; 4,684,516; 4,777,049; 4,994,276; 4,996,058; 5,128,143; 5,202,128; 5,376,384; 5,384,133; 5,445,829; 5,510,119; 5,618,560; 5,643,604; 5,891,474; 5,958,456; 6,039,980; 6,143,353; 6,126,969; 6,156,342; 6,197,347; 6,387,394; 6,399,096; 6,437,000; 6,447,796; 6,475,493; 6,491,950; 6,524,615; 6,838,094; 6,905,709; 6,923,984; 6,923,988; and 6,911,217; each of which is hereby incorporated by reference for its teaching of the preparation of controlled release dosage forms
  • a compound provided herein may be conveniently added to food or drinking water (e.g., for administration to non-human animals including companion animals (such as dogs and cats) and livestock).
  • Animal feed and drinking water compositions may be formulated so that the animal takes in an appropriate quantity of the composition along with its diet. It may also be convenient to present the composition as a premix for addition to feed or drinking water.
  • Compounds are generally administered in a therapeutically effective amount.
  • Preferred systemic doses are no higher than 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day (e.g., ranging from about 0.001 mg to about 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day), with oral doses generally being about 5-20 fold higher than intravenous doses (e.g., ranging from 0.01 to 40 mg per kilogram of body weight per day).
  • the amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage unit will vary depending, for example, upon the patient being treated, the particular mode of administration and any other co-administered drugs. Dosage units generally contain between from about 10 ⁇ g to about 500 mg of active ingredient. Optimal dosages may be established using routine testing, and procedures that are well known in the art.
  • compositions may be packaged for treating conditions responsive to VRl modulation (e.g., treatment of exposure to vanilloid ligand or other irritant, pain, itch, obesity or urinary incontinence).
  • Packaged pharmaceutical compositions generally include (i) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one VRl modulator as described herein and (ii) instructions (e.g., labeling or a package insert) indicating that the contained composition is to be used for treating a condition responsive to VRl modulation in the patient.
  • VRl modulators provided herein may be used to alter activity and/or activation of capsaicin receptors in a variety of contexts, both in vitro and in vivo.
  • VRl antagonists may be used to inhibit the binding of vanilloid ligand agonist (such as capsaicin and/or RTX) to capsaicin receptor in vitro or in vivo.
  • such methods comprise the step of contacting a capsaicin receptor with one or more VRl modulators provided herein, in the presence of vanilloid ligand in aqueous solution and under conditions otherwise suitable for binding of the ligand to capsaicin receptor.
  • the VRl modulator(s) are generally present at a concentration that is sufficient to alter the binding of vanilloid ligand to
  • the capsaicin receptor may be present in solution or suspension (e.g., in an isolated membrane or cell preparation), or in a cultured or isolated cell. Within certain embodiments, the capsaicin receptor is expressed by a neuronal cell present in a patient, and the aqueous solution is a body fluid.
  • one or more VRl modulators are administered to an animal in an amount such that the VRl modulator is present in at least one body fluid of the animal at a therapeutically effective concentration that is 5 micromolar or less; preferably 1 micromolar or less; more preferably 100 nanomolar or less.
  • such compounds may be administered at a therapeutically effective dose that is less than 20 mg/kg body weight, preferably less than 5 mg/kg and, in some instances, less than 1 mg/kg.
  • modulation may be achieved by contacting a capsaicin receptor (either in vitro or in vivo) with one or more VRl modulators provided herein under conditions suitable for binding of the modulator(s) to the receptor.
  • the VRl modulator(s) are generally present at a concentration that is sufficient to alter the binding of vanilloid ligand to VRl in vitro and/or VRl -mediated signal transduction as described herein.
  • the receptor may be present in solution or suspension, in a cultured or isolated cell preparation or in a cell within a patient.
  • the cell may be a neuronal cell that is contacted in vivo in an animal.
  • the cell may be an epithelial cell, such as a urinary bladder epithelial cell (urothelial cell) or an airway epithelial cell that is contacted in vivo in an animal.
  • Modulation of signal tranducing activity may be assessed by detecting an effect on calcium ion conductance (also referred to as calcium mobilization or flux).
  • Modulation of signal transducing activity may alternatively be assessed by detecting an alteration of a symptom (e.g., pain, burning sensation, broncho-constriction, inflammation, cough, hiccup, itch, urinary incontinence or overactive bladder) of a patient being treated with one or more VRl modulators provided herein.
  • a symptom e.g., pain, burning sensation, broncho-constriction, inflammation, cough, hiccup, itch, urinary incontinence or overactive bladder
  • VRl modulator(s) provided herein are preferably administered to a patient (e.g., a human) orally or topically, and are present within at least one body fluid of the animal while modulating VRl signal-transducing activity.
  • Preferred VRl modulators for use in such methods modulate VRl signal-transducing activity in vitro at a concentration of 1 nanomolar or less, preferably 100 picomolar or less, more preferably 20 picomolar or less, and in vivo at a concentration of 1 micromolar or less, 500 nanomolar or less, or 100 nanomolar or less in a body fluid such as blood.
  • the present invention further provides methods for treating conditions responsive to VRl modulation.
  • treatment encompasses both disease-modifying treatment and symptomatic treatment, either of which may be prophylactic (i.e., before the onset of symptoms, in order to prevent, delay or reduce the severity of symptoms) or therapeutic (i.e., after the onset of symptoms, in order to reduce the severity and/or duration of symptoms).
  • a condition is "responsive to VRl modulation” if it is characterized by inappropriate activity of a capsaicin receptor, regardless of the amount of vanilloid ligand present locally, and/or if modulation of capsaicin receptor activity results in alleviation of the condition or a symptom thereof.
  • Such conditions include, for example, symptoms resulting from exposure to VRl -activating stimuli, pain, respiratory disorders (such as cough, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic bronchitis, cystic fibrosis and rhinitis, including allergic rhinitis, such as seasonal an perennial rhinitis, and non-allergic rhinitis), depression, itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, diabetes and prediabetic conditions (e.g., insulin resistance or glucose tolerance), hiccup and obesity, as described in more detail below.
  • Such conditions may be diagnosed and monitored using criteria that have been established in the art. Patients may include humans, domesticated companion animals and livestock, with dosages as described above.
  • Treatment regimens may vary depending on the compound used and the particular condition to be treated; however, for treatment of most disorders, a frequency of administration of 4 times daily or less is preferred. In general, a dosage regimen of 2 times daily is more preferred, with once a day dosing particularly preferred. For the treatment of acute pain, a single dose that rapidly reaches effective concentrations is desirable. It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion, drug combination and the severity of the particular disease undergoing therapy. In general, the use of the minimum dose sufficient to provide effective therapy is preferred. Patients may generally be monitored for therapeutic effectiveness using medical or veterinary criteria suitable for the condition being treated or prevented.
  • Patients experiencing symptoms resulting from exposure to capsaicin receptor- activating stimuli include individuals with burns caused by heat, light, tear gas or acid and those whose mucous membranes are exposed (e.g., via ingestion, inhalation or eye contact) to capsaicin (e.g., from hot peppers or in pepper spray) or a related irritant such as acid, tear gas, infectious agent(s) or air pollutant(s).
  • the resulting symptoms (which may be treated using VRl modulators, especially antagonists, provided herein) may include, for example, pain, broncho-constriction and inflammation. Pain that may be treated using the VRl modulators provided herein may be chronic or acute and includes, but is not limited to, peripheral nerve-mediated pain (especially neuropathic pain).
  • Compounds provided herein may be used in the treatment of, for example, postmastectomy pain syndrome, stump pain, phantom limb pain, oral neuropathic pain, toothache (dental pain), denture pain, postherpetic neuralgia, diabetic neuropathy, chemotherapy-induced neuropathy, reflex sympathetic dystrophy, trigeminal neuralgia, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, fibromyalgia, Guillain-Barre syndrome, meralgia paresthetica, burning-mouth syndrome and/or pain associated with nerve and root damage, including as pain associated with peripheral nerve disorders (e.g., nerve entrapment and brachial plexus avulsions, amputation, peripheral neuropathies including bilateral peripheral neuropathy, tic douloureux, atypical facial pain, nerve root damage, and arachnoiditis).
  • peripheral nerve disorders e.g., nerve entrapment and brachial plexus avulsions, amputation, peripheral neuropathies
  • Additional neuropathic pain conditions include causalgia (reflex sympathetic dystrophy - RSD, secondary to injury of a peripheral nerve), neuritis (including, for example, sciatic neuritis, peripheral neuritis, polyneuritis, optic neuritis, postfebrile neuritis, migrating neuritis, segmental neuritis and Gombault's neuritis), neuronitis, neuralgias (e.g., those mentioned above, cervicobrachial neuralgia, cranial neuralgia, geniculate neuralgia, glossopharyngial neuralgia, migranous neuralgia, idiopathic neuralgia, intercostals neuralgia, mammary neuralgia, mandibular joint neuralgia, Morton's neuralgia, nasociliary neuralgia, occipital neuralgia, red neuralgia, Sluder's neuralgia, splenopalatine neuralg
  • Headache including headaches involving peripheral nerve activity may also be treated as described herein.
  • pain includes, for example, such as sinus, cluster (i.e., migranous neuralgia) and tension headaches, migraine, temporomandibular pain and maxillary sinus pain.
  • migraine headaches may be prevented by administration of a compound provided herein as soon as a pre-migrainous aura is experienced by the patient.
  • Charcot's pains intestinal gas pains, ear pain, heart pain, muscle pain, eye pain, orofacial pain (e.g., odontalgia), abdominal pain, gynaecological pain (e.g., menstrual pain, dysmenorrhoea, pain associated with cystitis, labor pain, chronic pelvic pain, chronic prostitis and endometriosis), acute and chronic back pain (e.g., lower back pain), gout, scar pain, hemorrhoidal pain, dyspeptic pains, angina, nerve root pain, "non-painful" neuropathies, complex regional pain syndrome, homotopic pain and heterotopic pain - including pain associated with carcinoma, often referred to as cancer pain (e.g., in patients with bone cancer), pain (and inflammation) associated with venom exposure (e.g., due to snake bite, spider bite, or insect sting) and trauma associated pain (e.g., post-surgical pain, episi
  • Additional pain conditions that may be treated as described herein include pain associated with respiratory disorders as described above, autoimmune diseases, immunodeficiency disorders, hot flashes, inflammatory bowel disease, gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD), irritable bowel syndrome and/or inflammatory bowel disease.
  • VRl modulators provided herein may be used for the treatment of mechanical pain.
  • mechanical pain refers to pain other than headache pain that is not neuropathic or a result of exposure to heat, cold or external chemical stimuli.
  • Mechanical pain includes physical trauma (other than thermal or chemical burns or other irritating and/or painful exposures to noxious chemicals) such as post-surgical pain and pain from cuts, bruises and broken bones; toothache; denture pain; nerve root pain; osteoarthritis; rheumatoid arthritis; fibromyalgia; meralgia paresthetica; back pain; cancer- associated pain; angina; carpel tunnel syndrome; and pain resulting from bone fracture, labor, hemorrhoids, intestinal gas, dyspepsia, and menstruation.
  • Itching conditions that may be treated include psoriatic pruritus, itch due to hemodialysis, aguagenic pruritus, and itching associated with vulvar vestibulitis, contact dermatitis, insect bites and skin allergies.
  • Urinary tract conditions that may be treated as described herein include urinary incontinence (including overflow incontinence, urge incontinence and stress incontinence), as well as overactive or unstable bladder conditions (including bladder detrusor hyper-reflexia, detrusor hyper-reflexia of spinal origin and bladder hypersensitivity).
  • VRl modulator is administered via a catheter or similar device, resulting in direct injection of VRl modulator into the bladder.
  • Compounds provided herein may also be used as anti-tussive agents (to prevent, relieve or suppress coughing, including cough induced by medications such as ACE inhibitors) and for the treatment of hiccup, for the treatment of menopause symptoms such as hot flashes, and to promote weight loss in an obese patient.
  • VRl modulators provided herein may be used within combination therapy for the treatment of conditions involving pain and/or inflammatory components.
  • Such conditions include, for example, autoimmune disorders and pathologic autoimmune responses known to have an inflammatory component including, but not limited to, arthritis (especially rheumatoid arthritis), psoriasis, Crohn's disease, lupus erythematosus, irritable bowel syndrome, tissue graft rejection, and hyperacute rejection of transplanted organs.
  • Other such conditions include trauma (e.g., injury to the head or spinal cord), cardio- and cerebro-vascular disease and certain infectious diseases.
  • a VRl modulator is administered to a patient along with an analgesic and/or anti-inflammatory agent.
  • the VRl modulator and analgesic and/or anti-inflammatory agent may be present in the same pharmaceutical composition, or may be administered separately in either order.
  • Anti-inflammatory agents include, for example, nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), non-specific and cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2) specific cyclooxgenase enzyme inhibitors, gold compounds, corticosteroids, methotrexate, tumor necrosis factor (TNF) receptor antagonists, anti-TNF alpha antibodies, anti-C5 antibodies, and interleukin-1 (IL-I) receptor antagonists.
  • NSAIDs nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs
  • COX-2 non-specific and cyclooxygenase-2
  • IL-I interleukin-1
  • NSAIDs include, but are not limited to ibuprofen, flurbiprofen, naproxen or naproxen sodium, diclofenac, combinations of diclofenac sodium and misoprostol, sulindac, oxaprozin, diflunisal, piroxicam, indomethacin, etodolac, fenoprofen calcium, ketoprofen, sodium nabumetone, sulfasalazine, tolmetin sodium, and hydroxychloroquine.
  • COX cyclooxygenase
  • NSAIDs further include salicylates such as acetylsalicylic acid or aspirin, sodium salicylate, choline and magnesium salicylates, and salsalate, as well as corticosteroids such as cortisone, dexamethasone, methylprednisolone, prednisolone, prednisolone sodium phosphate, and prednisone.
  • Further anti-inflammatory agents include meloxicam, etoricoxib, parecoxib, valdecoxib and tilicoxib. Suitable dosages for VRl modulator within a combination therapy are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of anti-inflammatory agents can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference.
  • the combination administration of a VRl modulator with an antiinflammatory agent results in a reduction of the dosage of the anti-inflammatory agent required to produce a therapeutic effect (i.e., a decrease in the minimum therapeutically effective amount).
  • the dosage of anti-inflammatory agent in a combination or combination treatment method is less than the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the anti-inflammatory agent without combination administration of a VRl antagonist. More preferably this dosage is less than 3 A, even more preferably less than Vi, and highly preferably, less than !4 of the maximum dose, while most preferably the dose is less than 10% of the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the anti-inflammatory agent(s) when administered without combination administration of a VRl antagonist. It will be apparent that the dosage amount of VRl antagonist component of the combination needed to achieve the desired effect may similarly be affected by the dosage amount and potency of the anti-inflammatory agent component of the combination.
  • the combination administration of a VRl modulator with an anti-inflammatory agent is accomplished by packaging one or more VRl modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents in the same package, either in separate containers within the package or in the same contained as a mixture of one or more VRl antagonists and one or more anti-inflammatory agents.
  • Preferred mixtures are formulated for oral administration (e.g., as pills, capsules, tablets or the like).
  • the package comprises a label bearing indicia indicating that the one or more VRl modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents are to be taken together for the treatment of an inflammatory pain condition.
  • VRl modulators provided herein may be used in combination with one or more additional pain relief medications.
  • Certain such medications are also anti- inflammatory agents, and are listed above.
  • Other such medications are analgesic agents, including narcotic agents which typically act at one or more opioid receptor subtypes (e.g., ⁇ , K and/or ⁇ ), preferably as agonists or partial agonists.
  • opioid receptor subtypes e.g., ⁇ , K and/or ⁇
  • Such agents include opiates, opiate derivatives and opioids, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates thereof.
  • narcotic analgesics include, within preferred embodiments, alfentanil, alphaprodine, anileridine, bezitramide, buprenorphine, butorphanol, codeine, diacetyldihydromorphine, diacetylmorphine, dihydrocodeine, diphenoxylate, ethylmorphine, fentanyl, heroin, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, isomethadone, levomethorphan, levorphane, levorphanol, meperidine, metazocine, methadone, methorphan, metopon, morphine, nalbuphine, opium extracts, opium fluid extracts, powdered opium, granulated opium, raw opium, tincture of opium, oxycodone, oxymorphone, paregoric, pentazocine, pethidine, phenazocine, piminodine, propoxyphene, racemethorphan
  • narcotic analgesic agents include acetorphine, acetyldihydrocodeine, acetylmethadol, allylprodine, alphracetylmethadol, alphameprodine, alphamethadol, benzethidine, benzylmorphine, betacetylmethadol, betameprodine, betamethadol, betaprodine, clonitazene, codeine methylbromide, codeine-N-oxide, cyprenorphine, desomorphine, dextromoramide, diampromide, diethylthiambutene, dihydromorphine, dimenoxadol, dimepheptanol, dimethylthiamubutene, dioxaphetyl butyrate, dipipanone, drotebanol, ethanol, ethylmethylthiambutene, etonitazene, e
  • analgesic agents include, for example acetaminophen (paracetamol); aspirin and other NSAIDs described above; NR2B antagonists; bradykinin antagonists; anti-migraine agents; anticonvulsants such as oxcarbazepine and carbamazepine; antidepressants (such as TCAs, SSRIs, SNRIs, substance P antagonists, etc.); spinal blocks; pentazocine/naloxone; meperidine; levo ⁇ hanol; bupreno ⁇ hine; hydromo ⁇ hone; fentanyl; sufentanyl; oxycodone; oxycodone/acetaminophen, nalbuphine and oxymo ⁇ hone.
  • analgesic agents include CB2-receptor agonists, such as AM 1241, capsaicin receptor antagonists and compounds that bind to the ⁇ 2 ⁇ subunit of voltage-gated calcium channels, such as gabapentin and pregabalin.
  • Representative anti-migraine agents for use in combination with a VRl modulator provided herein include CGRP antagonists, ergotamines and 5-HTi agonists, such as sumatripan, naratriptan, zolmatriptan and rizatriptan.
  • modulators provided herein may be used, for example, in the treatment of pulmonary disorders such as asthma, in combination with one or more beta(2)-adrenergic receptor agonists or leukotriene receptor antagonists (e.g., agents that inhibits the cysteinyl leukotriene CysLTi receptor).
  • CysLTi antagonists include montelukast, zafirlukast, and pranlukast.
  • a VRl modulator as provided herein may be used in combination with other medication designed to treat this condition, such as antibiotics, anti-inflammatory agents, cystinyl leukotrienes, histamine antagonists, corticosteroids, opioids, NMDA antagonists, proton pump inhibitors, nociceptin, neurokinin (NKl, NK2 and NK3) and bradykinin (BKl and BK2) receptor antagonists, cannabinoids, blockers of Na+- dependent channels and large conductance Ca +2 -dependent K + -channel activators.
  • other medication designed to treat this condition such as antibiotics, anti-inflammatory agents, cystinyl leukotrienes, histamine antagonists, corticosteroids, opioids, NMDA antagonists, proton pump inhibitors, nociceptin, neurokinin (NKl, NK2 and NK3) and bradykinin (BKl and BK2) receptor antagonists, cannabinoids, blockers of Na+- dependent channels and large conductance Ca
  • Specific agents include dexbrompheniramine plus pseudoephedrine, loratadine, oxymetazoline, ipratropium, albuterol, beclomethasone, mo ⁇ hine, codeine, pholcodeine and dextrometho ⁇ han.
  • the present invention further provides combination therapy for the treatment of urinary incontinence.
  • a VRl modulator may be used in combination with other medication designed to treat this condition, such as estrogen replacement therapy, progesterone congeners, electrical stimulation, calcium channel blockers, antispasmodic agents, cholinergic antagonists, antimuscarinic drugs, tricyclic antidepressants, SNRIs, beta adrenoceptor agonists, phosphodiesterase inhibitors, potassium channel openers, nociceptin/orphanin FQ (OP4) agonists, neurokinin (NKl and NK2) antagonists, P2X3 antagonists, musculotrophic drugs and sacral neuromodulation.
  • other medication designed to treat this condition such as estrogen replacement therapy, progesterone congeners, electrical stimulation, calcium channel blockers, antispasmodic agents, cholinergic antagonists, antimuscarinic drugs, tricyclic antidepressants, SNRIs, beta adrenoceptor agonists, phosphodiesterase inhibitors, potassium channel openers, nociceptin/orphanin FQ (OP
  • Specific agents include oxybutinin, emepronium, tolterodine, flavoxate, flurbiprofen, tolterodine, dicyclomine, propiverine, propantheline, dicyclomine, imipramine, doxepin, duloxetine, 1- deamino-8-D-arginine vasopressin, muscarinic receptor antagonists such as tolterodine and anticholinergic agents such as oxybutynin.
  • Suitable dosages for VRl modulator within such combination therapy are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of other pain relief medications can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference. In certain embodiments, the combination administration of a VRl modulator with one or more additional pain medications results in a reduction of the dosage of each therapeutic agent required to produce a therapeutic effect ⁇ e.g., the dosage or one or both agent may less than VA, less than V-, less than !4 or less than 10% of the maximum dose listed above or advised by the manufacturer).
  • compositions as described above may further comprise one or more additional medications as described above.
  • the additional medication is an analgesic.
  • packaged pharmaceutical preparations comprising one or more VRl modulators and one or more additional medications ⁇ e.g., analgesics) in the same package.
  • Such packaged pharmaceutical preparations generally include (i) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one VRl modulator as described herein; (ii) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one additional medication (such as a pain relief and/or anti-inflammatory medication) as described above and (iii) instructions ⁇ e.g., labeling or a package insert) indicating that the compositions are to be used simultaneously, separately or sequentially for treating or preventing a condition responsive to VRl modulation in the patient (such as a condition in which pain and/or inflammation predominates).
  • a condition responsive to VRl modulation in the patient such as a condition in which pain and/or inflammation predominates.
  • VRl agonists may further be used, for example, in crowd control (as a substitute for tear gas) or personal protection ⁇ e.g., in a spray formulation) or as pharmaceutical agents for the treatment of pain, itch, urinary incontinence or overactive bladder via capsaicin receptor desensitization.
  • crowd control as a substitute for tear gas
  • personal protection e.g., in a spray formulation
  • compounds for use in crowd control or personal protection are formulated and used according to conventional tear gas or pepper spray technology.
  • the present invention provides a variety of non- pharmaceutical in vitro and in vivo uses for the compounds provided herein.
  • such compounds may be labeled and used as probes for the detection and localization of capsaicin receptor (in samples such as cell preparations or tissue sections, preparations or fractions thereof).
  • compounds provided herein that comprise a suitable reactive group such as an aryl carbonyl, nitro or azide group may be used in photoaffinity labeling studies of receptor binding sites.
  • compounds provided herein may be used as positive controls in assays for receptor activity, as standards for determining the ability of a candidate agent to bind to capsaicin receptor, or as radiotracers for positron emission tomography (PET) imaging or for single photon emission computerized tomography (SPECT).
  • PET positron emission tomography
  • SPECT single photon emission computerized tomography
  • Such methods can be used to characterize capsaicin receptors in living subjects.
  • a VRl modulator may be labeled using any of a variety of well known techniques ⁇ e.g., radiolabeled with a radionuclide such as tritium, as described herein), and incubated with a sample for a suitable incubation time (e.g., determined by first assaying a time course of binding).
  • unbound compound is removed (e.g., by washing), and bound compound detected using any method suitable for the label employed (e.g., autoradiography or scintillation counting for radiolabeled compounds; spectroscopic methods may be used to detect luminescent groups and fluorescent groups).
  • any method suitable for the label employed e.g., autoradiography or scintillation counting for radiolabeled compounds; spectroscopic methods may be used to detect luminescent groups and fluorescent groups.
  • a matched sample containing labeled compound and a greater (e.g., 10-fold greater) amount of unlabeled compound may be processed in the same manner. A greater amount of detectable label remaining in the test sample than in the control indicates the presence of capsaicin receptor in the sample.
  • Detection assays including receptor autoradiography (receptor mapping) of capsaicin receptor in cultured cells or tissue samples may be performed as described by Kuhar in sections 8.1.1 to 8.1.9 of Current Protocols in Pharmacology (1998) John Wiley & Sons, New York.
  • modulators may be linked to the interior surface of a tissue culture plate or other support, for use as affinity ligands for immobilizing and thereby isolating, capsaicin receptors (e.g., isolating receptor-expressing cells) in vitro.
  • a modulator linked to a fluorescent marker such as fluorescein
  • FACS fluorescence activated cell sorting
  • such assays are standard competition binding assays, in which bound, labeled VRl modulator is displaced by a test compound. Briefly, such assays are performed by: (a) contacting capsaicin receptor with a radiolabeled VRl modulator as described herein, under conditions that permit binding of the VRl modulator to capsaicin receptor, thereby generating bound, labeled VRl modulator; (b) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled VRl modulator in the absence of test agent; (c) contacting the bound, labeled VRl modulator with a test agent; (d) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound labeled VRl modulator in the presence of test agent; and (e) detecting a decrease in signal detected in step (d), as compared to the signal detected in step (b).
  • Mass spectroscopy data in the following Examples is Electrospray MS, obtained in positive ion mode using a Micromass Time-of-Flight LCT (Waters Corp.; Milford, MA), equipped with a Waters 600 pump (Waters Corp.; Milford, MA), Waters 996 photodiode array detector (Waters Corp.; Milford, MA), and a Gilson 215 autosampler (Gilson, Inc.; Middleton, WI).
  • MassLynxTM Waters Corp.; Milford, MA version 4.0 software with OpenLynx Global ServerTM, OpenLynxTM and AutoLynxTM processing is used for data collection and analysis.
  • Sample volume of 1 microliter is injected onto a 50x4.6mm Chromolith SpeedROD RP- 18e column (Merck KGaA, Darmstadt, Germany), and eluted using a 2-phase linear gradient at a flow rate of 6 ml/min. Sample is detected using total absorbance count over the 220-340nm UV range.
  • the elution conditions are: Mobile Phase A - 95% water, 5% MeOH with 0.05% TFA; Mobile Phase B - 5% water, 95% MeOH with 0.025% TFA.
  • the following gradient is used: 0-0.5 min 10-100%B, hold at 100%B to 1.2 min, return to 10%B at 1.21 min. Inject to inject cycle is 2.15 min.
  • the determined molecular weight (MS) is provided as M+l, with retention times (R 1 -) given in minutes.
  • the IC 50 determined as described in Example 6 is 1 micromolar or less for compounds 1-10, 12-16 and 18-20.
  • This Example illustrates the preparation of substituted pyrimidinones.
  • This compound is prepared essentially according to the procedure described in Example 1 A.
  • Ethyl 2-methyl-3-oxobutanoate (5 g) is adsorbed onto 8g of bentonite and then ammonium hydroxide solution (12 mL) is added. The resulting mixture is allowed to stand at RT for two days. The mixture is diluted with DCM and the entire mixture is filtered through celite and concentrated to give the crude, ethyl 3-amino-2-methylbut-2-enoate (2.63 g). This crude material is mixed with 4-chlorophenyl isothiocyante (3.Ig) and pyridine (45 mL) and heated for 16 h at 45°C. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure and the residue triturated with a 1 : 1 mixture of ethyl acetate and hexanes. The title compound is collected as a white solid via suction filtration.
  • This compound is prepared by reacting ethyl 3-aminopent-2-enoate with 4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexanecarbonyl chloride using procedures analogous to those described above.
  • This compound is prepared by reacting ethyl 3-(4-
  • This carboxylic acid is prepared essentially as described above for the preparation of 1 -(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl] - 1 ,6-dihydropyrimidine-4- carboxylic acid.
  • This compound is prepared from the above carboxylic acid utilizing procedures analogous to those already given for tert-butyl ⁇ l-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]- 1 ,6-dihydropyrimidin-4-yl ⁇ methylcarbamate.
  • This compound is prepared by r of bicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylic acid (Gassman, P. G., Journal of the American Chemical Society, 1966, 88, 2252) with 1.2 equivalents of oxalyl chloride in DCM at RT followed by evaporation of the solvent.
  • This compound is prepared using conditions analogous to those already described starting with bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxylic acid [common name norbornane-2- carboxylic acid].
  • This compound is prepared by reaction of 3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexanecarboxylic acid with 1.2 equivalents of oxalyl chloride in DCM at RT followed by careful evaporation of the solvent.
  • This compound is prepared by reaction of 6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3- carboxylic acid with 1.2 equivalents of oxalyl chloride in DCM at RT followed by careful evaporation of the solvent. 4. methyl 3 -(6, 6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxamido)but-2-enoate
  • Table II are prepared using such methods.
  • a "*" in the column headed “IC 50 " indicates that the IC 50 determined as described in Example 6 is 1 micromolar or less (i.e., the concentration of such compounds that is required to provide a 50% decrease in the fluorescence response of cells exposed to one IC 50 of capsaicin is 1 micromolar or less).
  • the determined molecular weight (presented as M+l) is shown in the column headed "MS" in
  • This Example illustrates the preparation of VRl-transfected cells and VRl -containing membrane preparations for use in capsaicin binding assays (Example 5).
  • Patent No. 6,482,611 is subcloned in the plasmid pBK-CMV (Stratagene, La Jolla, CA) for recombinant expression in mammalian cells.
  • Human embryonic kidney (HEK293) cells are transfected with the pBK-CMV expression construct encoding the full length human capsaicin receptor using standard methods.
  • the transfected cells are selected for two weeks in media containing G418 (400 ⁇ g/ml) to obtain a pool of stably transfected cells. Independent clones are isolated from this pool by limiting dilution to obtain clonal stable cell lines for use in subsequent experiments.
  • cells are seeded in T 175 cell culture flasks in media without antibiotics and grown to approximately 90% confluency. The flasks are then washed with PBS and harvested in PBS containing 5 mM EDTA. The cells are pelleted by gentle centrifugation and stored at -80 0 C until assayed.
  • HEPES homogenization buffer (5mM KCl 5, 5.8mM NaCl, 0.75mM CaCl 2 , 2mM MgCl 2 , 320 mM sucrose, and 10 mM HEPES pH 7.4). Tissue homogenates are first centrifuged for 10 min at 1000 x g (4 0 C) to remove the nuclear fraction and debris, and then the supernatant from the first centrifugation is further centrifuged for 30 min at 35,000 x g (4 0 C) to obtain a partially purified membrane fraction. Membranes are resuspended in the HEPES homogenization buffer prior to the assay. An aliquot of this membrane homogenate is used to determine protein concentration via the Bradford method (BIO-RAD Protein Assay Kit, #500- 0001 , BIO-RAD, Hercules, CA).
  • This Example illustrates a representative assay of capsaicin receptor binding that may be used to determine the binding affinity of compounds for the capsaicin (VRl) receptor.
  • Binding studies with [ 3 H] Resiniferatoxin (RTX) are carried out essentially as described by Szallasi and Blumberg (1992) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ter. 262:883-888. In this protocol, non-specific RTX binding is reduced by adding bovine alphai acid glycoprotein (100 ⁇ g per tube) after the binding reaction has been terminated.
  • [ H] RTX (37 Ci/mmol) is synthesized by and obtained from the Chemical Synthesis and Analysis Laboratory, National Cancer Institute-Frederick Cancer Research and Development Center, Frederick, MD.
  • [ 3 H] RTX may also be obtained from commercial vendors (e.g., Amersham Pharmacia Biotech, Inc.; Piscataway, NJ).
  • the membrane homogenate of Example 4 is centrifuged as before and resuspended to a protein concentration of 333 ⁇ g/ml in homogenization buffer.
  • Binding assay mixtures are set up on ice and contain [ 3 H]RTX (specific activity 2200 mCi/ml), 2 ⁇ l non-radioactive test compound, 0.25 mg/ml bovine serum albumin (Cohn fraction V), and 5 x 10 4 - 1 * 10 5 VRl- transfected cells.
  • the final volume is adjusted to 500 ⁇ l (for competition binding assays) or 1,000 ⁇ l (for saturation binding assays) with the ice-cold HEPES homogenization buffer solution (pH 7.4) described above.
  • Non-specific binding is defined as that occurring in the presence of 1 ⁇ M non-radioactive RTX (Alexis Corp.; San Diego, CA).
  • [ 3 H]RTX is added in the concentration range of 7-1,000 pM, using 1 to 2 dilutions. Typically 11 concentration points are collected per saturation binding curve.
  • Competition binding assays are performed in the presence of 60 pM [ 3 H]RTX and various concentrations of test compound.
  • the binding reactions are initiated by transferring the assay mixtures into a 37°C water bath and are terminated following a 60 minute incubation period by cooling the tubes on ice.
  • Membrane-bound RTX is separated from free, as well as any alphai-acid glycoprotein-bound RTX, by filtration onto WALLAC glass fiber filters (PERKIN-ELMER, Gaithersburg, MD) which are pre-soaked with 1.0% PEI (polyethyleneimine) for 2 hours prior to use. Filters are allowed to dry overnight then counted in a WALLAC 1205 BETA PLATE counter after addition of WALLAC BETA SCINT scintillation fluid.
  • Equilibrium binding parameters are determined by fitting the allosteric Hill equation to the measured values with the aid of the computer program FIT P (Biosoft, Ferguson, MO) as described by Szallasi, et al. (1993) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 266:678-683.
  • Compounds provided herein generally exhibit K, values for capsaicin receptor of less than 1 ⁇ M, 100 nM, 50 nM, 25 nM, 10 nM, or 1 nM in this assay.
  • This Example illustrates representative calcium mobilization assays for use in evaluating test compounds for agonist and antagonist activity.
  • AM calcium sensitive dye (Molecular Probes, Eugene, OR) is added to each well (dye solution: 1 mg FLUO-3 AM, 440 ⁇ L DMSO and 440 ⁇ l 20% pluronic acid in DMSO, diluted 1 :250 in Krebs-Ringer HEPES (KRH) buffer (25 mM HEPES, 5 mM KCl, 0.96 mM
  • the EC 50 of the agonist capsaicin is first determined. An additional 20 ⁇ l of KRH buffer and 1 ⁇ l DMSO is added to each well of cells, prepared as described above. 100 ⁇ l capsaicin in KRH buffer is automatically transferred by the FLIPR instrument to each well.
  • y is the maximum fluorescence signal
  • x is the concentration of the agonist or antagonist (in this case, capsaicin)
  • a is the E m3x
  • b corresponds to the EC 50 value
  • c is the Hill coefficient.
  • Test compounds are dissolved in DMSO, diluted in KRH buffer, and immediately added to cells prepared as described above. 100 nM capsaicin (an approximate EC 90 concentration) is also added to cells in the same 96-well plate as a positive control. The final concentration of test compounds in the assay wells is between 0.1 nM and 5 ⁇ M.
  • the ability of a test compound to act as an agonist of the capsaicin receptor is determined by measuring the fluorescence response of cells expressing capsaicin receptors elicited by the compound as function of compound concentration. This data is fit as described above to obtain the EC 50 , which is generally less than 1 micromolar, preferably less than 100 nM, and more preferably less than 10 nM.
  • the extent of efficacy of each test compound is also determined by calculating the response elicited by a concentration of test compound (typically 1 ⁇ M) relative to the response elicited by 100 nM capsaicin. This value, called Percent of Signal (POS), is calculated by the following equation:
  • Agonists of the human capsaicin receptor generally elicit detectable responses at concentrations less than 100 ⁇ M, or preferably at concentrations less than 1 ⁇ M, or most preferably at concentrations less than 10 nM.
  • Extent of efficacy at human capsaicin receptor is preferably greater than 30 POS, more preferably greater than 80 POS at a concentration of 1 ⁇ M.
  • Certain agonists are essentially free of antagonist activity as demonstrated by the absence of detectable antagonist activity in the assay described below at compound concentrations below 4 nM, more preferably at concentrations below 10 ⁇ M and most preferably at concentrations less than or equal to 100 ⁇ M.
  • Test compounds are dissolved in DMSO, diluted in 20 ⁇ l KRH buffer so that the final concentration of test compounds in the assay well is between 1 ⁇ M and 5 ⁇ M, and added to cells prepared as described above.
  • the 96 well plates containing prepared cells and test compounds are incubated in the dark, at RT for 0.5 to 6 hours. It is important that the incubation not continue beyond 6 hours.
  • 100 ⁇ l capsaicin in KRH buffer at twice the EC 50 concentration is automatically added by the FLIPR instrument to each well of the 96 well plate for a final sample volume of 200 ⁇ l and a final capsaicin concentration equal to the EC 50 .
  • the final concentration of test compounds in the assay wells is between 1 ⁇ M and 5 ⁇ M.
  • Antagonists of the capsaicin receptor decrease this response by at least about 20%, preferably by at least about 50%, and most preferably by at least 80%, as compared to matched control (i.e., cells treated with capsaicin at twice the EC50 concentration in the absence of test compound), at a concentration of 10 micromolar or less, preferably 1 micromolar or less.
  • the concentration of antagonist required to provide a 50% decrease, relative to the response observed in the presence of capsaicin and without antagonist is the IC 50 for the antagonist, and is preferably below 1 micromolar, 100 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar.
  • the data is analyzed as follows. First, the average maximum relative fluorescent unit
  • KALEIDAGRAPH software Synergy Software, Reading, PA
  • test compound IC 50 is determined using a linear regression in which x is ln(concentration of test compound) and y is ln(percent inhibition ⁇ 100 - percent inhibition). Data with a percent inhibition that is greater than 90% or less than 15% are rejected and are not used in the regression. The IC 50 calculated in this fashion is e intercept/slope)
  • Certain preferred VRl modulators are antagonists that are essentially free of agonist activity as demonstrated by the absence of detectable agonist activity in the assay described above at compound concentrations below 4 nM, more preferably at concentrations below 10 ⁇ M and most preferably at concentrations less than or equal to 100 ⁇ M.
  • This Example illustrates a representative dorsal root ganglian cell assay for evaluating VRl antagonist or agonist activity of a compound.
  • DRG DRG are dissected from neonatal rats, dissociated and cultured using standard methods (Aguayo and White (1992) Brain Research 570:61-67). After 48 hour incubation, cells are washed once and incubated for 30-60 minutes with the calcium sensitive dye Fluo 4 AM (2.5-10 ug/ml; TefLabs, Austin, TX). Cells are then washed once. Addition of capsaicin to the cells results in a VRl -dependent increase in intracellular calcium levels which is monitored by a change in Fluo-4 fluorescence with a fluorometer. Data are collected for 60- 180 seconds to determine the maximum fluorescent signal. For antagonist assays, various concentrations of compound are added to the cells.
  • Fluorescent signal is then plotted as a function of compound concentration to identify the concentration required to achieve a 50% inhibition of the capsaicin-activated response, or IC 50 .
  • Antagonists of the capsaicin receptor preferably have an IC50 below 1 micromolar, 100 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar.
  • EC 50 or concentration required to achieve 50% of the maximum signal for a capsaicin-activated response, is preferably below 1 micromolar, below 100 nanomolar or below 10 nanomolar.
  • This Example illustrates representative methods for assessing the degree of pain relief provided by a compound.
  • the following methods may be used to assess pain relief.
  • Compounds are effective in reversing or preventing mechanical allodynia-like symptoms if rats treated with such compounds require stimulation with a Von Frey filament of higher rigidity strength to provoke a positive allodynic response as compared to control untreated or vehicle treated rats.
  • testing of an animal in chronic pain may be done before and after compound administration.
  • an effective compound results in an increase in the rigidity of the filament needed to induce a response after treatment, as compared to the filament that induces a response before treatment or in an animal that is also in chrome pain but is left untreated or is treated with vehicle.
  • Test compounds are administered before or after onset of pain. When a test compound is administered after pain onset, testing is performed 10 minutes to three hours after administration.
  • Test compound may be administered before or after onset of pain. For compounds administered after pain onset, testing is performed 10 minutes to three hours after administration.
  • THERMAL HYPERALGESIA Thermal hyperalgesia (an exaggerated response to noxious thermal stimulus) is measured essentially as described by Hargreaves et al. (1988) Pain. 32(l):77-88. Briefly, a constant radiant heat source is applied the animals' plantar surface of either hind paw. The time to withdrawal (i.e., the amount of time that heat is applied before the animal moves its paw), otherwise described as thermal threshold or latency, determines the animal's hind paw sensitivity to heat.
  • Test compound produces a reduction in thermal hyperalgesia if there is a statistically significant increase in the time to hindpaw withdrawal (i.e., the thermal threshold to response or latency is increased).
  • Test compound may be administered before or after onset of pain. For compounds administered after pain onset, testing is performed 10 minutes to three hours after administration.
  • Pain may be induced using any of the following methods, to allow testing of analgesic efficacy of a compound.
  • compounds provided herein result in a statistically significant reduction in pain as determined by at least one of the previously described testing methods, using male SD rats and at least one of the following models.
  • Acute inflammatory pain is induced using the carrageenan model essentially as described by Field et al. (1997) Br. J. Pharmacol. 121(8): 1513-1522. 100-200 ⁇ l of 1-2% carrageenan solution is injected into the rats' hind paw. Three to four hours following injection, the animals' sensitivity to thermal and mechanical stimuli is tested using the methods described above.
  • a test compound (0.01 to 50 mg/kg) is administered to the animal, prior to testing, or prior to injection of carrageenan. The compound can be administered orally or through any parenteral route, or topically on the paw. Compounds that relieve pain in this model result in a statistically significant reduction in mechanical allodynia and/or thermal hyperalgesia.
  • rats are tested for thermal hyperalgesia, mechanical allodynia and mechanical hyperalgesia as described above.
  • rats are tested on days 5, 6, and 7 following CFA injection.
  • animals are treated with a test compound, morphine or vehicle.
  • An oral dose of morphine of 1 -5 mg/kg is suitable as positive control.
  • a dose of 0.01-50 mg/kg of test compound is used.
  • Compounds can be administered as a single bolus prior to testing or once or twice or three times daily, for several days prior to testing. Drugs are administered orally or through any parenteral route, or applied topically to the animal.
  • MPE Percent Maximum Potential Efficacy
  • Chronic neuropathic pain is induced using the chronic constriction injury (CCI) to the rat's sciatic nerve essentially as described by Bennett and Xie (1988) Pain 33:87-107.
  • Rats are anesthetized (e.g. with an intraperitoneal dose of 50-65 mg/kg pentobarbital with additional doses administered as needed).
  • the lateral aspect of each hind limb is shaved and disinfected.
  • aseptic technique an incision is made on the lateral aspect of the hind limb at the mid thigh level.
  • the biceps femoris is bluntly dissected and the sciatic nerve is exposed.

Abstract

Substituted pyrimidinones are provided, of the Formula (I): wherein variables are as described herein. Such compounds are ligands that may be used to modulate specific receptor activity in vivo or in vitro, and are particularly useful in the treatment of conditions associated with pathological receptor activation in humans, domesticated companion animals and livestock animals. Pharmaceutical compositions and methods for using such compounds to treat such disorders are provided, as are methods for using such ligands for receptor localization studies.

Description

SUBSTITUTED PYRIMIDINONES
RELATED APPLICATIONS This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application Nos.
60/943,547, filed June 12, 2007, 61/016,429, filed February 11, 2008, and 61/022,432, filed February 22, 2008. The contents of all of these applications are incorporated herein in their entirety.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
This invention relates generally to substituted pyrimidinones that have useful pharmacological properties. The invention further relates to the use of such compounds for treating conditions related to capsaicin receptor activation, for identifying other agents that bind to capsaicin receptor, and as probes for the detection and localization of capsaicin receptors.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Pain perception, or nociception, is mediated by the peripheral terminals of a group of specialized sensory neurons, termed "nociceptors." A wide variety of physical and chemical stimuli induce activation of such neurons in mammals, leading to recognition of a potentially harmful stimulus. Inappropriate or excessive activation of nociceptors, however, can result in debilitating acute or chronic pain.
Neuropathic pain involves pain signal transmission in the absence of stimulus, and typically results from damage to the nervous system. In most instances, such pain is thought to occur because of sensitization in the peripheral and central nervous systems following initial damage to the peripheral system (e.g., via direct injury or systemic disease). Neuropathic pain is typically burning, shooting and unrelenting in its intensity and can sometimes be more debilitating that the initial injury or disease process that induced it.
Existing treatments for neuropathic pain are largely ineffective. Opiates, such as morphine, are potent analgesics, but their usefulness is limited because of adverse side effects, such as physical addictiveness and withdrawal properties, as well as respiratory depression, mood changes, and decreased intestinal motility with concomitant constipation, nausea, vomiting, and alterations in the endocrine and autonomic nervous systems. In addition, neuropathic pain is frequently non-responsive or only partially responsive to conventional opioid analgesic regimens. Treatments employing the N-methyl-D-aspartate antagonist ketamine or the alpha(2)-adrenergic agonist clonidine can reduce acute or chronic pain, and permit a reduction in opioid consumption, but these agents are often poorly tolerated due to side effects. Topical treatment with capsaicin has been used to treat chronic and acute pain, including neuropathic pain. Capsaicin is a pungent substance derived from the plants of the Solanaceae family (which includes hot chili peppers) and appears to act selectively on the small diameter afferent nerve fibers (A-delta and C fibers) that are believed to mediate pain. The response to capsaicin is characterized by persistent activation of nociceptors in peripheral tissues, followed by eventual desensitization of peripheral nociceptors to one or more stimuli. From studies in animals, capsaicin appears to trigger C fiber membrane depolarization by opening cation selective channels for calcium and sodium.
Similar responses are also evoked by structural analogues of capsaicin that share a common vanilloid moiety. One such analogue is resiniferatoxin (RTX), a natural product of Euphorbia plants. The term vanilloid receptor (VR) was coined to describe the neuronal membrane recognition site for capsaicin and such related irritant compounds. The capsaicin response is competitively inhibited (and thereby antagonized) by another capsaicin analog, capsazepine, and is also inhibited by the non-selective cation channel blocker ruthenium red, which binds to VR with no more than moderate affinity (typically with a K1 value of no lower than 140 μM).
Rat and human vanilloid receptors have been cloned from dorsal root ganglion cells. The first type of vanilloid receptor to be identified is known as vanilloid receptor type 1 (VRl, also known as TRPVl), and the terms "VRl" and "capsaicin receptor" are used interchangeably herein to refer to rat and/or human receptors of this type, as well as mammalian homologues. The role of VRl in pain sensation has been confirmed using mice lacking this receptor, which exhibit no vanilloid-evoked pain behavior and impaired responses to heat and inflammation. VRl is a nonselective cation channel with a threshold for opening that is lowered in response to elevated temperatures, low pH, and capsaicin receptor agonists. Opening of the capsaicin receptor channel is generally followed by the release of inflammatory peptides from neurons expressing the receptor and other nearby neurons, increasing the pain response. After initial activation by capsaicin, the capsaicin receptor undergoes a rapid desensitization via phosphorylation by cAMP-dependent protein kinase.
Because of their ability to desensitize nociceptors in peripheral tissues, VRl agonist vanilloid compounds have been used as topical anesthetics. However, agonist application may itself cause burning pain, which limits this therapeutic use. Recently, it has been reported that VRl antagonists, including certain nonvanilloid compounds, are also useful for the treatment of pain (see, e.g., PCT International Application Publication Numbers WO 05/049613, WO 06/100520, WO 06/120481 and WO 06/122200). Thus, compounds that interact with VRl, but do not elicit the initial painful sensation of VRl agonist vanilloid compounds, are desirable for the treatment of chronic and acute pain, including neuropathic pain, as well as other conditions that are responsive to capsaicin receptor modulation. The present invention fulfills this need, and provides further related advantages.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention provides substituted pyrimidinones of Formula I:
Formula I
Figure imgf000004_0001
as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts of such compounds. Within Formula I:
Ar is 6- to 10-membered aryl (e.g., phenyl) or a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, (e.g., pyridyl) that is optionally substituted and is preferably substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, Ci-Cόalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2- Cβalkynyl, Ci-Cδhaloalkyl, Ci-Cόhydroxyalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cδhaloalkoxy, (C3- C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino; Ri is: (i) hydrogen, halogen, hydroxy, amino or cyano; or
(ii) Ci-C6alkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)Co- C4alkyl, phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted and each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from R7; R2 is:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen or cyano;
(ii) Ci-C6alkyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, CrC6alkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0- C4alkyl, or phenyl, each of which is optionally substituted and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from R7; or (iii) a group of the formula:
Figure imgf000004_0002
wherein R5 and R6 are independently chosen from hydrogen, Ci-C6alkyl, C2-
C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C)-C6alkanoyl, Cr C6alkylsulfonyl and (4- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl, each of which is optionally substituted and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from R7; or R5 and R6 are taken together to form a
4- to 7-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from R7; and R3 is:
(i) (C3-C7cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents (e.g., from 1 to 4 substituents) independently chosen from Ci-C6alkyl, C]-C6haloalkyl and substituents that are taken together to form a fused C3-C7cycloalkyl or a Ci-C3alkylene bridge;
(ii) Ci-C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, Ci-C6haloalkoxy, Ci-C6alkylthio, Ci-C6haloalkylthio or mono- or di-(C]-C6alkyl)amino, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from R7, phenyl and 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, which phenyl and heteroaryl are substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from R7,
such that R3 is not unsubstituted benzylthio (i.e.,
Figure imgf000005_0001
(iii) phenoxy that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from R7; and each R7 is independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, C)-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, d-C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6hydroxyalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, C,-
C6haloalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino.
Within certain aspects, compounds of Formula I are VRl modulators and exhibit a K; of no greater than 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar in a capsaicin receptor binding assay and/or have an EC50 or IC50 value of no greater than 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar in an in vitro assay for determination of capsaicin receptor agonist or antagonist activity. In certain embodiments, such VRl modulators are VRl antagonists and exhibit no detectable agonist activity in an in vitro assay of capsaicin receptor activation
(e.g., the assay provided in Example 6, herein) at a concentration equal to the IC50, 10 times the IC50 or 100 times the IC50.
Within certain aspects, compounds provided herein are labeled with a detectable marker (e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated). The present invention further provides, within other aspects, pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one substituted pyrimidinone in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
Within further aspects, methods are provided for reducing calcium conductance of a cellular capsaicin receptor, comprising contacting a cell (e.g., neuronal, such as cells of the central nervous system or peripheral ganglia, urothelial or lung) that expresses a capsaicin receptor with at least one VRl modulator as described herein. Such contact may occur in vivo or in vitro and is generally performed using a concentration of VRl modulator that is sufficient to alter the binding of vanilloid ligand to VRl in vitro (using the assay provided in Example 5) and/or VRl -mediated signal transduction (using an assay provided in Example 6).
Methods are further provided for inhibiting binding of vanilloid ligand to a capsaicin receptor. Within certain aspects, the inhibition takes place in vitro. Such methods comprise contacting a capsaicin receptor with at least one VRl modulator as described herein, under conditions and in an amount or concentration sufficient to detectably inhibit vanilloid ligand binding to the capsaicin receptor. Within other aspects, the capsaicin receptor is in a patient. Such methods comprise contacting cells expressing a capsaicin receptor in a patient with at least one VRl modulator as described herein in an amount or concentration that would be sufficient to detectably inhibit vanilloid ligand binding to cells expressing a cloned capsaicin receptor in vitro. The present invention further provides methods for treating a condition responsive to capsaicin receptor modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one VRl modulator as described herein.
Within other aspects, methods are provided for treating pain in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from (or at risk for) pain a therapeutically effective amount of at least one VRl modulator as described herein.
Methods are further provided for treating itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, menopause symptoms, cough and/or hiccup in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from (or at risk for) one or more of the foregoing conditions a therapeutically effective amount of at least one VRl modulator as described herein. The present invention further provides methods for promoting weight loss in an obese patient, comprising administering to an obese patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one VRl modulator as described herein.
Methods are further provided for identifying an agent that binds to capsaicin receptor, comprising: (a) contacting capsaicin receptor with a labeled compound as described herein under conditions that permit binding of the compound to capsaicin receptor, thereby generating bound, labeled compound; (b) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled compound in the absence of test agent; (c) contacting the bound, labeled compound with a test agent; (d) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound labeled compound in the presence of test agent; and (e) detecting a decrease in signal detected in step (d), as compared to the signal detected in step (b).
Within further aspects, the present invention provides methods for determining the presence or absence of capsaicin receptor in a sample, comprising: (a) contacting a sample with a compound as described herein under conditions that permit binding of the compound to capsaicin receptor; and (b) detecting a signal indicative of a level of the compound bound to capsaicin receptor.
The present invention also provides packaged pharmaceutical preparations, comprising: (a) a pharmaceutical composition as described herein in a container; and (b) instructions for using the composition to treat one or more conditions responsive to capsaicin receptor modulation, such as pain, itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, cough, hiccup and/or obesity.
In yet another aspect, the present invention provides methods for preparing the compounds disclosed herein, including the intermediates.
These and other aspects of the invention will become apparent upon reference to the following detailed description.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
As noted above, the present invention provides substituted pyrimidinones. Such compounds may be used in vitro or in vivo, to modulate capsaicin receptor activity in a variety of contexts. TERMINOLOGY
Compounds are generally described herein using standard nomenclature. For compounds having asymmetric centers, it should be understood that (unless otherwise specified) all of the optical isomers and mixtures thereof are encompassed. In addition, compounds with carbon-carbon double bonds may occur in Z- and E- forms, with all isomeric forms of the compounds being included in the present invention unless otherwise specified. Where a compound exists in various tautomeric forms, a recited compound is not limited to any one specific tautomer, but rather is intended to encompass all tautomeric forms. Certain compounds are described herein using a general formula that includes variables (e.g., Ri, Ar). Unless otherwise specified, each variable within such a formula is defined independently of any other variable, and any variable that occurs more than one time in a formula is defined independently at each occurrence.
The phrase "substituted pyrimidinones," as used herein, encompasses all compounds of Formula I, as well as compounds of other Formulas provided herein (including any enantiomers, racemates and stereoisomers) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof. In certain embodiments, substituted pyrimidinones provided herein are isolated so as to be substantially free of residual organic solvent (i.e., any such solvent in the preparation is present in an amount that is at or below the limit set for that solvent by the International Council on Harmonisation of Technical Requirements for Registration of Pharmaceuticals for Human Use (ICH)).
A "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" of a compound recited herein is an acid or base salt that is suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings or animals without excessive toxicity or carcinogenicity, and preferably without irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication. Such salts include mineral and organic acid salts of basic residues such as amines, as well as alkali or organic salts of acidic residues such as carboxylic acids. Specific pharmaceutically acceptable anions for use in salt formation include, but are not limited to, acetate, 2-acetoxybenzoate, ascorbate, benzoate, bicarbonate, bromide, calcium edetate, carbonate, chloride, citrate, dihydrochloride, diphosphate, ditartrate, edetate, estolate (ethylsuccinate), formate, fumarate, gluceptate, gluconate, glutamate, glycolate, glycollylarsanilate, hexylresorcinate, hydrabamine, hydrobromide, hydrochloride, hydroiodide, hydroxymaleate, hydroxynaphthoate, iodide, isethionate, lactate, lactobionate, malate, maleate, mandelate, methylbromide, methylnitrate, methylsulfate, mucate, napsylate, nitrate, pamoate, pantothenate, phenylacetate, phosphate, polygalacturonate, propionate, salicylate, stearate, subacetate, succinate, sulfamate, sulfanilate, sulfate, sulfonates including besylate (benzenesulfonate), camsylate (camphorsulfonate), edisylate (ethane- 1,2- disulfonate), esylate (ethanesulfonate) 2-hydroxyethylsulfonate, mesylate (methanesulfonate), triflate (trifluoromethanesulfonate) and tosylate (p-toluenesulfonate), tannate, tartrate, teoclate and triethiodide. Similarly, pharmaceutically acceptable cations for use in salt formation include, but are not limited to ammonium, benzathine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, ethylenediamine, meglumine, procaine, and metals such as aluminum, calcium, lithium, magnesium, potassium, sodium and zinc. Those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize further pharmaceutically acceptable salts for the compounds provided herein. In general, a pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base salt can be synthesized from a parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by any conventional chemical method. Briefly, such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, the use of nonaqueous media, such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, methanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile, is preferred.
It will be apparent that compounds and salts thereof provided herein may, but need not, be formulated as a hydrate, and that such hydrates are encompassed by the formulas, names and structures recited herein. In addition, the various non-hydrate solvates, non- covalent complexes, crystal forms and polymorphs of the compounds provided herein are within the scope of the present invention. Also provided herein are prodrugs of the compounds of the recited Formulas. A "prodrug" is a compound that may not fully satisfy the structural requirements of the compounds provided herein, but is modified in vivo, following administration to a patient, to produce a compound a formula provided herein. For example, a prodrug may be an acylated derivative of a compound as provided herein. Prodrugs include compounds wherein hydroxy, amine or sulfhydryl groups are bonded to any group that, when administered to a mammalian subject, cleaves to form a free hydroxy, amino, or sulfhydryl group, respectively. Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, acetate, formate and benzoate derivatives of alcohol and amine functional groups within the compounds provided herein. Prodrugs of the compounds provided herein may be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compounds in such a way that the modifications are cleaved in vivo to yield the parent compounds. As used herein, the term "alkyl" refers to a straight or branched chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon. Alkyl groups include, for example, groups having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms (Ci-Cδalkyl) and from 1 to 4 carbon atoms (Ci-C4alkyl), such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-buty\, pentyl, 2-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, 2-hexyl, 3-hexyl and 3-methylpentyl. In some instances, a substituent of an alkyl group is specifically indicated. For example, "hydroxyalkyl" refers to an alkyl group substituted with at least one hydroxy substituent.
"Alkylene" refers to a divalent alkyl group, as defined above. Ci-C2alkylene is methylene or ethylene; C0-C4alkylene is a single covalent bond or an alkylene group having 1, 2, 3 or carbon atoms; Co-C2alkylene is a single covalent bond or an alkylene group having 1 or 2 carbon atoms.
"Alkenyl" refers to a straight or branched chain alkene group, which comprises at least one unsaturated carbon-carbon double bond. Alkenyl groups include, for example, C2- Cόalkenyl, which has from 2 to 6 carbon atoms, such as ethenyl, allyl or isopropenyl. "Alkynyl" refers to straight or branched chain alkyne groups, which have one or more unsaturated carbon-carbon bonds, at least one of which is a triple bond. Alkynyl groups include, for example, C2-C6alkynyl, which has from 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
A "cycloalkyl" is a group that comprises one or more saturated and/or partially saturated rings in which all ring members are carbon, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, and partially saturated variants of the foregoing, such as cyclohexenyl. Cycloalkyl groups do not comprise an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring. Certain cycloalkyl groups are C3-C7cycloalkyl, in which the cycloalkyl group contains a single ring having from 3 to 7 ring members, all of which are carbon. A "(C3- C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl" is a C3-C7cycloalkyl group linked via a single covalent bond or a Ci-C4alkylene group.
The term "oxo" is used herein to refer to an oxygen substituent of a carbon atom that results in the formation of a carbonyl group (C=O). An oxo group that is a substituent of a nonaromatic carbon atom results in a conversion of -CH2- to -C(=O)-. An oxo group that is a substituent of an aromatic carbon atom results in a conversion of -CH- to -C(=O)- and may result in a loss of aromaticity.
By "alkoxy," as used herein, is meant an alkyl group as described above attached via an oxygen bridge. Alkoxy groups include Ci-Cβalkoxy and Ci-C4alkoxy groups, which have from 1 to 6 or from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. Methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, n-pentoxy, 2-pentoxy, 3-pentoxy, isopentoxy, neopentoxy, hexoxy, 2-hexoxy, 3-hexoxy, and 3-methylpentoxy are representative alkoxy groups. Similarly, "alkylthio" refers to an alkyl group as described above attached via a sulfur bridge.
The term "alkanoyl" refers to an acyl group (e.g., -(C=O)-alkyl), in which carbon atoms are in a linear or branched alkyl arrangement and where attachment is through the carbon of the keto group. Alkanoyl groups have the indicated number of carbon atoms, with the carbon of the keto group being included in the numbered carbon atoms. For example a C2alkanoyl group is an acetyl group having the formula -(C=O)CH3. Alkanoyl groups include, for example, C]-C6alkanoyl and Ci-Gjalkanoyl groups, which have from 1 to 6 or from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. "Cialkanoyl" refers to -(C=O)H." "Alkyl ether" refers to a linear or branched ether substituent (i.e., an alkyl group that is substituted with an alkoxy group). Alkyl ether groups include, for example, C2-C6alkyl ether groups, which have 2 to 6 carbon atoms. A C2 alkyl ether has the structure -CH2-O-CH3.
"Alkylamino" refers to a secondary or tertiary amine that has the general structure - NH-alkyl or -N(alkyl)(alkyl), wherein each alkyl is selected independently from alkyl, cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups. Such groups include, for example, mono- and di- (Ci-C6alkyl)amino groups, in which each Ci-Cβalkyl may be the same or different. It will be apparent that the definition of "alkyl" as used in the term "alkylamino" differs from the definition of "alkyl" used for all other alkyl-containing groups, in the inclusion of cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups (e.g., (C3-C6cycloalkyl)Co-C3alkyl). " Alkylsulfonyl" refers to groups of the formula -(SO2)-alkyl, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment. Alkylsulfonyl groups include, for example, Ci-C6alkylsulfonyl groups, which have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
The term "halogen" refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
A "haloalkyl" is an alkyl group that is substituted with 1 or more independently chosen halogens (e.g., "Ci-Cόhaloalkyl" groups have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms). Examples of haloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, mono-, di- or tri-fluoromethyl; mono-, di- or tri-chloromethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, terra- or penta-fluoroethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta- chloroethyl; and 1,2,2,2-tetrafluoro-l-trifluoromethyl-ethyl. Typical haloalkyl groups are trifluoromethyl and difluoromethyl. The term "haloalkoxy" refers to a haloalkyl group as defined above that is linked via an oxygen bridge. The term "haloalkylthio" refers to a haloalkyl group as defined above that is linked via a sulfur bridge.
"Aryl" refers to a cyclic moiety (e.g., a monocycle or a fused bicyclic group) in which all ring members are carbon and at least one ring is aromatic. Aryl groups include, for example, phenyl and groups with fused rings such as naphthyl, fluorenyl, indanyl and 1,2,3,4- tetrahydro-naphthyl.
A "heterocycle" is a group that comprises at least one heterocyclic ring (i.e., a ring in which one or more ring atoms are heteroatoms independently chosen from O, S and N, with the remaining ring atoms being carbon). Additional rings, if present, may be heterocyclic or carbocyclic. Typically, a heterocyclic ring comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatoms; within certain embodiments each heterocyclic ring has 1 or 2 heteroatoms per ring. Each heterocyclic ring generally contains from 3 to 8 ring members (rings having from 4 or 5 to 7 ring members are recited in certain embodiments). Certain heterocycles comprise a sulfur atom as a ring member; in certain embodiments, the sulfur atom is oxidized to SO or SO2. Heterocycles may be optionally substituted with a variety of substituents, as indicated. Unless otherwise specified, a heterocycle may be a heterocycloalkyl group (i.e., each ring is saturated or partially saturated) or a heteroaryl group (i.e., an aromatic group in which at least one aromatic ring comprises at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S), and may be linked via any ring atom, provided that a stable compound results. A "(4- to 7-membered heterocycle)Co-C4alkyl" is a heterocyclic ring containing from 4 to 7 ring members that is linked via a single covalent bond (Co) or a Ci-C4alkylene moiety. Representative 4- to 7- membered heterocycles include, for example, heterocycloalkyl moieties such as piperazine, piperidine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, pyrrolidine and imidazolidine, as well as 5- and 6- membered heteroaryls such as imidazole, furan, furazan, isothiazole, isoxazole, oxadiazole, oxazole, pyrazine, pyrazole, pyridazine, pyridine, pyrimidine, tetrazole, thiazole and thiophene.
A "substituent," as used herein, refers to a molecular moiety that is covalently bonded to an atom within a molecule of interest. For example, a ring substituent may be a moiety such as a halogen, alkyl group, haloalkyl group or other group that is covalently bonded to an atom (preferably a carbon or nitrogen atom) that is a ring member. Substituents of aromatic groups are generally covalently bonded to a ring carbon atom. The term "substitution" refers to replacing a hydrogen atom in a molecular structure with a substituent, such that the valence on the designated atom is not exceeded, and such that a chemically stable compound (i.e., a compound that can be isolated, characterized, and tested for biological activity) results from the substitution. Groups that are "optionally substituted" are unsubstituted or are substituted by other than hydrogen at one or more available positions, typically 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 positions, by one or more suitable groups (which may be the same or different). Optional substitution is also indicated by the phrase "substituted with from 0 to X substituents," where X is the maximum number of possible substituents. Certain optionally substituted groups are substituted with from 0 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents {i.e., are unsubstituted or substituted with up to the recited maximum number of substituents). Other optionally substituted groups are substituted with at least one substituent {e.g., substituted with from 1 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents).
The terms "VRl" and "capsaicin receptor" are used interchangeably herein to refer to a type 1 vanilloid receptor. Unless otherwise specified, these terms encompass both rat and human VRl receptors {e.g., GenBank Accession Numbers AF327067, AJ277028 and NM O 18727; sequences of certain human VRl cDNAs and the encoded amino acid sequences are provided in U.S. Patent No. 6,482,611), as well as homologies thereof found in other species. A "VRl modulator," also referred to herein as a "modulator," is a compound that modulates VRl activation and/or VRl -mediated signal transduction. VRl modulators specifically provided herein are compounds of Formula I and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and esters thereof. Certain preferred VRl modulators are not vanilloids. A VRl modulator may be a VRl agonist or antagonist. Certain modulators bind to VRl with a K1 that is less than 1 micromolar, preferably less than 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar. A representative assay for determining Kj at VRl is provided in
Example 5, herein.
A modulator is considered an "antagonist" if it detectably inhibits vanilloid ligand binding to VRl and/or VRl -mediated signal transduction (using, for example, the representative assay provided in Example 6); in general, such an antagonist inhibits VRl activation with a IC50 value of less than 1 micromolar, preferably less than 500 nanomolar, and more preferably less than 100 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar within the assay provided in Example 6. VRl antagonists include neutral antagonists and inverse agonists.
An "inverse agonist" of VRl is a compound that reduces the activity of VRl below its basal activity level in the absence of added vanilloid ligand. Inverse agonists of VRl may also inhibit the activity of vanilloid ligand at VRl and/or binding of vanilloid ligand to VRl. The basal activity of VRl, as well as the reduction in VRl activity due to the presence of VRl antagonist, may be determined from a calcium mobilization assay, such as the assay of Example 6. A "neutral antagonist" of VRl is a compound that inhibits the activity of vanilloid ligand at VRl, but does not significantly change the basal activity of the receptor (i.e., within a calcium mobilization assay as described in Example 6 performed in the absence of vanilloid ligand, VRl activity is reduced by no more than 10%, preferably by no more than 5%, and more preferably by no more than 2%; most preferably, there is no detectable reduction in activity). Neutral antagonists of VRl may inhibit the binding of vanilloid ligand to VRl .
As used herein a "capsaicin receptor agonist" or "VRl agonist" is a compound that elevates the activity of the receptor above the basal activity level of the receptor (i.e., enhances VRl activation and/or VRl -mediated signal transduction). Capsaicin receptor agonist activity may be identified using the representative assay provided in Example 6. In general, such an agonist has an EC50 value of less than 1 micromolar, preferably less than 500 nanomolar, and more preferably less than 100 nanomolar or 10 nanomolar within the assay provided in Example 6.
A "vanilloid" is any compound that comprises a phenyl ring with two oxygen atoms bound to adjacent ring carbon atoms (one of which carbon atom is located para to the point of attachment of a third moiety that is bound to the phenyl ring). Capsaicin is a representative vanilloid. A "vanilloid ligand" is a vanilloid that binds to VRl with a Kj (determined as described herein) that is no greater than 10 μM. Vanilloid ligand agonists include capsaicin, olvanil, N-arachidonoyl-dopamine and resiniferatoxin (RTX). Vanilloid ligand antagonists include capsazepine and iodo-resiniferatoxin. A "therapeutically effective amount" (or dose) is an amount that, upon administration to a patient, results in a discernible patient benefit (e.g., provides detectable relief from at least one condition being treated). Such relief may be detected using any appropriate criteria, including alleviation of one or more symptoms such as pain. A therapeutically effective amount or dose generally results in a concentration of compound in a body fluid (such as blood, plasma, serum, CSF, synovial fluid, lymph, cellular interstitial fluid, tears or urine) that is sufficient to alter the binding of vanilloid ligand to VRl in vitro (using the assay provided in Example 5) and/or VRl -mediated signal transduction (using an assay provided in Example 6). It will be apparent that the discernible patient benefit may be apparent after administration of a single dose, or may become apparent following repeated administration of the therapeutically effective dose according to a predetermined regimen, depending upon the indication for which the compound is administered.
By "statistically significant," as used herein, is meant results varying from control at the p<0.1 level of significance as measured using a standard parametric assay of statistical significance such as a student's T test.
A "patient" is any individual treated with a compound provided herein. Patients include humans, as well as other animals such as companion animals (e.g., dogs and cats) and livestock. Patients may be experiencing one or more symptoms of a condition responsive to capsaicin receptor modulation (e.g., pain, exposure to vanilloid ligand, itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, respiratory disorders, cough and/or hiccup), or may be free of such symptom(s) (i.e., treatment may be prophylactic in a patient considered at risk for the development of such symptoms).
SUBSTITUTED PYRIMIDINONES
As noted above, the present invention provides substituted pyrimidinones of Formula I. Within certain aspects, such compounds are VRl modulators that may be used in a variety of contexts, including in the treatment of pain (e.g., neuropathic or peripheral nerve-mediated pain); exposure to capsaicin; exposure to acid, heat, light, tear gas, air pollutants (such as, for example, tobacco smoke), infectious agents (including viruses, bacteria and yeast), pepper spray or related agents; respiratory conditions such as asthma or chronic obstructive pulmonary disease; itch; urinary incontinence or overactive bladder; cough or hiccup; menopause symptoms and/or obesity. Such compounds may also be used within in vitro assays (e.g., assays for receptor activity), as probes for detection and localization of VRl and as standards in ligand binding and VRl -mediated signal transduction assays. Ar is, in certain embodiments, phenyl or a 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted as described above. In certain compounds, Ar is phenyl or pyridyl, each of which is substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, nitro and Ci-Cδalkyl. The variable Ri, in certain substituted pyrimidinones, is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, Q-
C4alkyl, (C3-C5cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, or phenyl that is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, oxo, d-C4alkyl, Ci- Gjhaloalkyl, Ci-C4alkoxy and Ci-C4haloalkoxy. In certain such compounds, Ri is hydrogen, cyano, halogen, Ci-C4alkyl or C]-C4alkanoyl. In further such compounds, Ri is bromo, chloro, fluoro, iodo, methyl or ethyl.
In certain embodiments, R2 is Ci-Cδalkyl; Q-Cohydroxyalkyl, Ci-Cόaminoalkyl, C2- C6alkyl ether or Ci-Cδhaloalkyl; or a group of the formula:
Figure imgf000015_0001
wherein R5 and R6 are independently chosen from hydrogen, Ci-Cόalkyl, (C3- C7cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, and Ci-C6alkylsulfonyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from R7, such that at least one of R5 and
R6 is not hydrogen; or R5 and R^ are taken together to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from
R7. It will be apparent that when R2 is hydroxy, Formula I encompasses the tautomeric structure.
In certain embodiments, R3 is C5-C7cycloalkyl that is substituted with from 1 to 2 substituents independently chosen from C)-C4alkyl, halogen and Ci-C4haloalkyl. Representative R3 groups include, for example:
Figure imgf000015_0002
w rein n is an interger rangin.g from 0 to.5. ,.,. ,,,.di3.
Certain substituted pyrimidinones further satisfy Formula II or Formula III:
Figure imgf000016_0001
Formula II Formula III in which:
A is CH or N;
R4 represents from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, Ci-Cβalkyl, Q-Qhaloalkyl, Ci-C6hydroxyalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy and Ci- Cβhaloalkoxy; and
Rx is Ci-C4alkyl or Ci-Qhaloalkyl.
It will be apparent that Formula I encompasses both cis and trans isomers, and
Formula III specifically recites the cis isomer. Representative Rx moieties include, for example, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, t-butyl, difluoromethyl and trifluoromethyl. Representative compounds provided herein include, but are not limited to, those specifically described in Examples 2 and 3. It will be apparent that the specific compounds recited herein are representative only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention. Further, as noted above, all compounds of the present invention may be present as a free acid or base, or as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt. In addition, other forms such as hydrates and prodrugs of such compounds are specifically contemplated by the present invention.
Within certain aspects of the present invention, substituted pyrimidinones provided herein detectably alter (modulate) VRl activity, as determined using an in vitro VRl functional assay such as a calcium mobilization assay. As an initial screen for such activity, a VRl ligand binding assay may be used. References herein to a "VRl ligand binding assay" are intended to refer to a standard in vitro receptor binding assay such as that provided in
Example 5, and a "calcium mobilization assay" (also referred to herein as a "signal transduction assay") may be performed as described in Example 6. Briefly, to assess binding to VRl, a competition assay may be performed in which a VRl preparation is incubated with labeled {e.g., 125I or 3H) compound that binds to VRl {e.g., a capsaicin receptor agonist such as RTX) and unlabeled test compound. Within the assays provided herein, the VRl used is preferably mammalian VRl, more preferably human or rat VRl . The receptor may be recombinantly expressed or naturally expressed. The VRl preparation may be, for example, a membrane preparation from HEK293 or CHO cells that recombinantly express human VRl . Incubation with a compound that detectably modulates vanilloid ligand binding to VRl results in a decrease or increase in the amount of label bound to the VRl preparation, relative to the amount of label bound in the absence of the compound. This decrease or increase may be used to determine the Kj at VRl as described herein. In general, compounds that decrease the amount of label bound to the VRl preparation within such an assay are preferred. Certain VRl modulators provided herein detectably modulate VRl activity at nanomolar (i.e., submicromolar) concentrations, at subnanomolar concentrations, or at concentrations below 100 picomolar, 20 picomolar, 10 picomolar or 5 picomolar.
As noted above, compounds that are VRl antagonists are preferred within certain embodiments. IC50 values for such compounds may be determined using a standard in vitro VRl -mediated calcium mobilization assay, as provided in Example 6. Briefly, cells expressing capsaicin receptor are contacted with a compound of interest and with an indicator of intracellular calcium concentration {e.g., a membrane permeable calcium sensitivity dye such as Fluo-3 or Fura-2 (Molecular Probes, Eugene, OR), each of which produce a fluorescent signal when bound to Ca+*). Such contact is preferably carried out by one or more incubations of the cells in buffer or culture medium comprising either or both of the compound and the indicator in solution. Contact is maintained for an amount of time sufficient to allow the dye to enter the cells {e.g., 1-2 hours). Cells are washed or filtered to remove excess dye and are then contacted with a vanilloid receptor agonist (e.g., capsaicin, RTX or olvanil), typically at a concentration equal to the EC50 concentration, and a fluorescence response is measured. When agonist-contacted cells are contacted with a compound that is a VRl antagonist the fluorescence response is generally reduced by at least 20%, preferably at least 50% and more preferably at least 80%, as compared to cells that are contacted with the agonist in the absence of test compound. The IC50 for VRl antagonists provided herein is preferably less than 1 micromolar, less than 100 nM, less than 10 nM or less than 1 nM. In certain embodiments, VRl antagonists provided herein exhibit no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of capsaicin receptor agonism at a concentration of compound equal to the IC50. Certain such antagonists exhibit no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of capsaicin receptor agonism at a concentration of compound that is 100- fold higher than the IC50. In other embodiments, compounds that are capsaicin receptor agonists are preferred.
Capsaicin receptor agonist activity may generally be determined as described in Example 6. When cells are contacted with 1 micromolar of a compound that is a VRl agonist, the fluorescence response is generally increased by an amount that is at least 30% of the increase observed when cells are contacted with 100 nM capsaicin. The EC50 for VRl agonists provided herein is preferably less than 1 micromolar, less than 100 nM or less than 10 nM. VRl modulating activity may also, or alternatively, be assessed using a cultured dorsal root ganglion assay as provided in Example 7 and/or an in vivo pain relief assay as provided in Example 8. VRl modulators provided herein preferably have a statistically significant specific effect on VRl activity within one or more functional assays provided herein. Within certain embodiments, VRl modulators provided herein do not substantially modulate ligand binding to other cell surface receptors, such as EGF receptor tyrosine kinase or the nicotinic acetylcholine receptor. In other words, such modulators do not substantially inhibit activity of a cell surface receptor such as the human epidermal growth factor (EGF) receptor tyrosine kinase or the nicotinic acetylcholine receptor (e.g., the IC50 or IC40 at such a receptor is preferably greater than 1 micromolar, and most preferably greater than 10 micromolar). Preferably, a modulator does not detectably inhibit EGF receptor activity or nicotinic acetylcholine receptor activity at a concentration of 0.5 micromolar, 1 micromolar or more preferably 10 micromolar. Assays for determining cell surface receptor activity are commercially available, and include the tyrosine kinase assay kits available from Panvera (Madison, WI).
In certain embodiments, preferred VRl modulators are non-sedating. In other words, a dose of VRl modulator that is twice the minimum dose sufficient to provide analgesia in an animal model for determining pain relief (such as a model provided in Example 8, herein) causes only transient (i.e., lasting for no more than 1A the time that pain relief lasts) or preferably no statistically significant sedation in an animal model assay of sedation (using the method described by Fitzgerald et al. (1988) Toxicology 49(2-3):433-9). Preferably, a dose that is five times the minimum dose sufficient to provide analgesia does not produce statistically significant sedation. More preferably, a VRl modulator provided herein does not produce sedation at intravenous doses of less than 25 mg/kg (preferably less than 10 mg/kg) or at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg (preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg).
If desired, compounds provided herein may be evaluated for certain pharmacological properties including, but not limited to, oral bioavailability (preferred compounds are orally bioavailable to an extent allowing for therapeutically effective concentrations of the compound to be achieved at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg, preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg, even more preferably less than 10 mg/kg, still more preferably less than 1 mg/kg and most preferably less than 0.1 mg/kg), toxicity (a preferred compound is nontoxic when a therapeutically effective amount is administered to a subject), side effects (a preferred compound produces side effects comparable to placebo when a therapeutically effective amount of the compound is administered to a subject), serum protein binding and in vitro and in vivo half-life (a preferred compound exhibits an in vivo half-life allowing for Q.I. D. dosing, preferably T.I. D. dosing, more preferably B.I.D. dosing, and most preferably once-a-day dosing). In addition, differential penetration of the blood brain barrier may be desirable for VRl modulators used to treat pain by modulating CNS VRl activity such that total daily oral doses as described above provide such modulation to a therapeutically effective extent, while low brain levels of VRl modulators used to treat peripheral nerve mediated pain may be preferred (i.e., such doses do not provide brain (e.g., CSF) levels of the compound sufficient to significantly modulate VRl activity). Routine assays that are well known in the art may be used to assess these properties, and identify superior compounds for a particular use. For example, assays used to predict bioavailability include transport across human intestinal cell monolayers, including Caco-2 cell monolayers. Penetration of the blood brain barrier of a compound in humans may be predicted from the brain levels of the compound in laboratory animals given the compound (e.g., intravenously). Serum protein binding may be predicted from albumin binding assays. Compound half-life is inversely proportional to the frequency of dosage of a compound. In vitro half-lives of compounds may be predicted from assays of microsomal half-life as described, for example, within Example 7 of U.S. Patent Application Publication Number 2005/0070547.
As noted above, preferred compounds provided herein are nontoxic. In general, the term "nontoxic" shall be understood in a relative sense and is intended to refer to any substance that has been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration ("FDA") for administration to mammals (preferably humans) or, in keeping with established criteria, is susceptible to approval by the FDA for administration to mammals (preferably humans). In addition, a highly preferred nontoxic compound generally satisfies one or more of the following criteria: (1) does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production; (2) does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals; (3) does not cause substantial liver enlargement, or (4) does not cause substantial release of liver enzymes.
As used herein, a compound that does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production is a compound that satisfies the criteria set forth in Example 8 of U.S. Patent Application Publication Number 2005/0070547. In other words, cells treated as described therein with 100 μM of such a compound exhibit ATP levels that are at least 50% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, such cells exhibit ATP levels that are at least 80% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
A compound that does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals is a compound that does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals (as determined by electrocardiography) in guinea pigs, minipigs or dogs upon administration of a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound. In certain preferred embodiments, a dose of 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals. A compound does not cause substantial liver enlargement if daily treatment of laboratory rodents (e.g., mice or rats) for 5-10 days with a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound results in an increase in liver to body weight ratio that is no more than 100% over matched controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not cause liver enlargement of more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. If non-rodent mammals (e.g., dogs) are used, such doses should not result in an increase of liver to body weight ratio of more than 50%, preferably not more than 25%, and more preferably not more than 10% over matched untreated controls. Preferred doses within such assays include 0.01, 0.05. 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally. Similarly, a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if administration of twice the minimum dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 at VRl for the compound does not elevate serum levels of ALT, LDH or AST in laboratory animals (e.g., rodents) by more than 100% over matched mock-treated controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not elevate such serum levels by more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. Alternatively, a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if, in an in vitro hepatocyte assay, concentrations (in culture media or other such solutions that are contacted and incubated with hepatocytes in vitro) that are equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound do not cause detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels seen in media from matched mock-treated control cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, there is no detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels when such compound concentrations are five-fold, and preferably ten-fold the EC50 or IC50 for the compound.
In other embodiments, certain preferred compounds do not inhibit or induce microsomal cytochrome P450 enzyme activities, such as CYPl A2 activity, CYP2A6 activity, CYP2C9 activity, CYP2C19 activity, CYP2D6 activity, CYP2E1 activity or CYP3A4 activity at a concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 at VRl for the compound.
Certain preferred compounds are not clastogenic (e.g., as determined using a mouse erythrocyte precursor cell micronucleus assay, an Ames micronucleus assay, a spiral micronucleus assay or the like) at a concentration equal the EC50 or IC50 for the compound. In other embodiments, certain preferred compounds do not induce sister chromatid exchange
(e.g., in Chinese hamster ovary cells) at such concentrations.
For detection purposes, as discussed in more detail below, VRl modulators provided herein may be isotopically-labeled or radiolabeled. For example, compounds may have one or more atoms replaced by an atom of the same element having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature. Examples of isotopes that can be present in the compounds provided herein include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2H, 3H, 11C, 13C, 14C,
15N, 18O, 17O, 31P, 32P, 35S, 18F and 36Cl. In addition, substitution with heavy isotopes such as deuterium (i.e., 2H) can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances.
PREPARATION OF SUBSTITUTED PYRIMIDINONES
Substituted pyrimidinones may generally be prepared using standard synthetic methods. Starting materials are commercially available from suppliers such as Sigma-Aldrich
Corp. (St. Louis, MO), or may be synthesized from commercially available precursors using established protocols. By way of example, a synthetic route similar to that shown in any of the following Schemes may be used, together with synthetic methods known in the art of synthetic organic chemistry. Each variable in the following schemes refers to any group consistent with the description of the compounds provided herein.
Certain abbreviations used in the following Schemes and elsewhere herein include: δ chemical shift
DCE dichloroethane
DCM dichloromethane
Dess Martin 1,1,1 -Tris(acetyloxy)- 1 , 1 -dihydro- 1 ,.'
DMF N,N-dimethylformamide
DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
DPPA diphenyl phosphoryl azide
EtOAc ethyl acetate
EtOH ethanol h hour(s)
1H NMR proton nuclear magnetic resonance
HPLC high pressure liquid chromatography
Hz hertz
Me methyl min minute(s)
MS mass spectrometry
(M+ 1) mass + 1
NCS N-chlorosuccinimide NIS N-iodosuccinimide
Pd(PPh3)4 tetrakis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (0) Rochelle's Salt potassium sodium tartrate
RT room temperature
Selectfluor™ 1 -chloromethyl-4-fluoro- 1 ,4-diazoniabicyclo[2.2.2]octane bis- (tetrafluoroborate)
TFA trifluoroacetic acid
THF tetrahydrofuran
TLC thin layer chromatography
Scheme 1
Figure imgf000022_0001
1-E 1-C
R1-B(OH)2
Figure imgf000022_0002
Palladium catalyst
Scheme 2
Figure imgf000023_0001
In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein may contain one or more asymmetric carbon atoms, so that the compound can exist in different stereoisomeric forms.
Such forms can be, for example, racemates or optically active forms. As noted above, all stereoisomers are encompassed by the present invention. Nonetheless, it may be desirable to obtain single enantiomers {i.e., optically active forms). Standard methods for preparing single enantiomers include asymmetric synthesis and resolution of the racemates. Resolution of the racemates can be accomplished, for example, by conventional methods such as crystallization in the presence of a resolving agent, or chromatography using, for example a chiral HPLC column.
Compounds may be radiolabeled by carrying out their synthesis using precursors comprising at least one atom that is a radioisotope. Each radioisotope is preferably carbon (e.g., 14C), hydrogen (e.g., 3H), sulfur (e.g., 35S), or iodine (e.g., 125I). Tritium labeled compounds may also be prepared catalytically via platinum-catalyzed exchange in tritiated acetic acid, acid-catalyzed exchange in tritiated trifluoroacetic acid, or heterogeneous- catalyzed exchange with tritium gas using the compound as substrate. In addition, certain precursors may be subjected to tritium-halogen exchange with tritium gas, tritium gas reduction of unsaturated bonds, or reduction using sodium borotritide, as appropriate. Preparation of radiolabeled compounds may be conveniently performed by a radioisotope supplier specializing in custom synthesis of radiolabeled probe compounds.
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS
The present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising one or more compounds provided herein, together with at least one physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient. Pharmaceutical compositions may comprise, for example, one or more of water, buffers (e.g., neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline), ethanol, mineral oil, vegetable oil, dimethylsulfoxide, carbohydrates (e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose or dextrans), mannitol, proteins, adjuvants, polypeptides or amino acids such as glycine, antioxidants, chelating agents such as EDTA or glutathione and/or preservatives. In addition, other active ingredients may (but need not) be included in the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein.
Pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated for any appropriate manner of administration, including, for example, topical, oral, nasal, rectal or parenteral administration. The term parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intradermal, intravascular (e.g., intravenous), intramuscular, spinal, intracranial, intrathecal and intraperitoneal injection, as well as any similar injection or infusion technique. In certain embodiments, compositions suitable for oral use are preferred. Such compositions include, for example, tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oily suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsion, hard or soft capsules, or syrups or elixirs. Within yet other embodiments, pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated as a lyophilizate. Formulation for topical administration may be preferred for certain conditions (e.g., in the treatment of skin conditions such as burns or itch). Formulation for direct administration into the bladder (intravesicular administration) may be preferred for treatment of urinary incontinence and overactive bladder. Compositions intended for oral use may further comprise one or more components such as sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and/or preserving agents in order to provide appealing and palatable preparations. Tablets contain the active ingredient in admixture with physiologically acceptable excipients that are suitable for the manufacture of tablets. Such excipients include, for example, inert diluents (e.g., calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate), granulating and disintegrating agents (e.g., corn starch or alginic acid), binding agents (e.g., starch, gelatin or acacia) and lubricating agents (e.g., magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc). Tablets may be formed using standard techniques, including dry granulation, direct compression and wet granulation. The tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques.
Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent (e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin), or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium (e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil). Aqueous suspensions contain the active material(s) in admixture with suitable excipients, such as suspending agents (e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydropropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia); and dispersing or wetting agents (e.g., naturally-occurring phosphatides such as lecithin, condensation products of an alkylene oxide with fatty acids such as polyoxyethylene stearate, condensation products of ethylene oxide with long chain aliphatic alcohols such as heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol, condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and a hexitol such as polyoxyethylene sorbitol monooleate, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides such as polyethylene sorbitan monooleate). Aqueous suspensions may also comprise one or more preservatives, such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents, and/or one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
Oily suspensions may be formulated by suspending the active ingredient(s) in a vegetable oil (e.g., arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil) or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin. The oily suspensions may contain a thickening agent such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol. Sweetening agents such as those set forth above, and/or flavoring agents may be added to provide palatable oral preparations. Such suspensions may be preserved by the addition of an anti-oxidant such as ascorbic acid.
Dispersible powders and granules suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, a suspending agent and one or more preservatives. Suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents are exemplified by those already mentioned above. Additional excipients, such as sweetening, flavoring and coloring agents, may also be present.
Pharmaceutical compositions may also be formulated as oil-in-water emulsions. The oily phase may be a vegetable oil {e.g., olive oil or arachis oil), a mineral oil {e.g., liquid paraffin) or a mixture thereof. Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums {e.g., gum acacia or gum tragacanth), naturally-occurring phosphatides {e.g., soy bean lecithin, and esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol), anhydrides {e.g., sorbitan monoleate) and condensation products of partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol with ethylene oxide {e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monoleate). An emulsion may also comprise one or more sweetening and/or flavoring agents.
Syrups and elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, such as glycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations may also comprise one or more demulcents, preservatives, flavoring agents and/or coloring agents. Formulations for topical administration typically comprise a topical vehicle combined with active agent(s), with or without additional optional components. Suitable topical vehicles and additional components are well known in the art, and it will be apparent that the choice of a vehicle will depend on the particular physical form and mode of delivery. Topical vehicles include water; organic solvents such as alcohols {e.g., ethanol or isopropyl alcohol) or glycerin; glycols {e.g., butylene, isoprene or propylene glycol); aliphatic alcohols {e.g., lanolin); mixtures of water and organic solvents and mixtures of organic solvents such as alcohol and glycerin; lipid-based materials such as fatty acids, acylglycerols (including oils, such as mineral oil, and fats of natural or synthetic origin), phosphoglycerides, sphingolipids and waxes; protein-based materials such as collagen and gelatin; silicone-based materials (both non-volatile and volatile); and hydrocarbon-based materials such as microsponges and polymer matrices. A composition may further include one or more components adapted to improve the stability or effectiveness of the applied formulation, such as stabilizing agents, suspending agents, emulsifying agents, viscosity adjusters, gelling agents, preservatives, antioxidants, skin penetration enhancers, moisturizers and sustained release materials. Examples of such components are described in Martindale— The Extra Pharmacopoeia (Pharmaceutical Press, London 1993) and Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 21st ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia, PA (2005). Formulations may comprise microcapsules, such as hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nanoparticles or nanocapsules. A topical formulation may be prepared in any of a variety of physical forms including, for example, solids, pastes, creams, foams, lotions, gels, powders, aqueous liquids and emulsions. The physical appearance and viscosity of such pharmaceutically acceptable forms can be governed by the presence and amount of emulsifier(s) and viscosity adjusters) present in the formulation. Solids are generally firm and non-pourable and commonly are formulated as bars or sticks, or in particulate form; solids can be opaque or transparent, and optionally can contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product. Creams and lotions are often similar to one another, differing mainly in their viscosity; both lotions and creams may be opaque, translucent or clear and often contain emulsifiers, solvents, and viscosity adjusting agents, as well as moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product. Gels can be prepared with a range of viscosities, from thick or high viscosity to thin or low viscosity. These formulations, like those of lotions and creams, may also contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product. Liquids are thinner than creams, lotions, or gels and often do not contain emulsifiers. Liquid topical products often contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
Suitable emulsifiers for use in topical formulations include, but are not limited to, ionic emulsifiers, cetearyl alcohol, non-ionic emulsifiers like polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, PEG-40 stearate, ceteareth-12, ceteareth-20, ceteareth-30, ceteareth alcohol, PEG-100 stearate and glyceryl stearate. Suitable viscosity adjusting agents include, but are not limited to, protective colloids or non-ionic gums such as hydroxyethylcellulose, xanthan gum, magnesium aluminum silicate, silica, microcrystalline wax, beeswax, paraffin, and cetyl palmitate. A gel composition may be formed by the addition of a gelling agent such as chitosan, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, polyquaterniums, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carbomer or ammoniated glycyrrhizinate. Suitable surfactants include, but are not limited to, nonionic, amphoteric, ionic and anionic surfactants. For example, one or more of dimethicone copolyol, polysorbate 20, polysorbate 40, polysorbate 60, polysorbate 80, lauramide DEA, cocamide DEA, and cocamide MEA, oleyl betaine, cocamidopropyl phosphatidyl PG- dimonium chloride, and ammonium laureth sulfate may be used within topical formulations. Suitable preservatives include, but are not limited to, antimicrobials such as methylparaben, propylparaben, sorbic acid, benzoic acid, and formaldehyde, as well as physical stabilizers and antioxidants such as vitamin E, sodium ascorbate/ascorbic acid and propyl gallate. Suitable moisturizers include, but are not limited to, lactic acid and other hydroxy acids and their salts, glycerin, propylene glycol, and butylene glycol. Suitable emollients include lanolin alcohol, lanolin, lanolin derivatives, cholesterol, petrolatum, isostearyl neopentanoate and mineral oils. Suitable fragrances and colors include, but are not limited to, FD&C Red No. 40 and FD&C Yellow No. 5. Other suitable additional ingredients that may be included a topical formulation include, but are not limited to, abrasives, absorbents, anti-caking agents, anti-foaming agents, anti-static agents, astringents (e.g., witch hazel, alcohol and herbal extracts such as chamomile extract), binders/excipients, -buffering agents, chelating agents, film forming agents, conditioning agents, propellants, opacifying agents, pH adjusters and protectants.
An example of a suitable topical vehicle for formulation of a gel is: hydroxypropylcellulose (2.1%); 70/30 isopropyl alcohol/water (90.9%); propylene glycol (5.1%); and Polysorbate 80 (1.9%). An example of a suitable topical vehicle for formulation as a foam is: cetyl alcohol (1.1%); stearyl alcohol (0.5%; Quaternium 52 (1.0%); propylene glycol (2.0%); Ethanol 95 PGF3 (61.05%); deionized water (30.05%); P75 hydrocarbon propellant (4.30%). All percents are by weight.
Typical modes of delivery for topical compositions include application using the fingers; application using a physical applicator such as a cloth, tissue, swab, stick or brush; spraying (including mist, aerosol or foam spraying); dropper application; sprinkling; soaking; and rinsing.
A pharmaceutical composition may be prepared as a sterile injectible aqueous or oleaginous suspension. The compound(s) provided herein, depending on the vehicle and concentration used, can either be suspended or dissolved in the vehicle. Such a composition may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing, wetting agents and/or suspending agents such as those mentioned above. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, 1,3-butanediol, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils may be employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil may be employed, including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectible compositions, and adjuvants such as local anesthetics, preservatives and/or buffering agents can be dissolved in the vehicle.
Pharmaceutical compositions may also be formulated as suppositories (e.g., for rectal administration). Such compositions can be prepared by mixing the drug with a suitable non- irritating excipient that is solid at ordinary temperatures but liquid at the rectal temperature and will therefore melt in the rectum to release the drug. Suitable excipients include, for example, cocoa butter and polyethylene glycols.
Compositions for inhalation typically can be provided in the form of a solution, suspension or emulsion that can be administered as a dry powder or in the form of an aerosol using a conventional propellant (e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane or trichlorofluoromethane).
Pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated for release at a pre-determined rate. Instantaneous release may be achieved, for example, via sublingual administration (i.e., administration by mouth in such a way that the active ingredient(s) are rapidly absorbed via the blood vessels under the tongue rather than via the digestive tract). Controlled release formulations (i.e., formulations such as a capsule, tablet or coated tablet that slows and/or delays release of active ingredient(s) following administration) may be administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at a target site. In general, a controlled release formulation comprises a matrix and/or coating that delays disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract (or implantation site) and thereby provides a delayed action or a sustained action over a longer period. One type of controlled- release formulation is a sustained-release formulation, in which at least one active ingredient is continuously released over a period of time at a constant rate. Preferably, the therapeutic agent is released at such a rate that blood (e.g., plasma) concentrations are maintained within the therapeutic range, but below toxic levels, over a period of time that is at least 4 hours, preferably at least 8 hours, and more preferably at least 12 hours. Such formulations may generally be prepared using well known technology and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at the desired target site. Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable; preferably the formulation provides a relatively constant level of modulator release. The amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the site of implantation, the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
Controlled release may be achieved by combining the active ingredient(s) with a matrix material that itself alters release rate and/or through the use of a controlled-release coating. The release rate can be varied using methods well known in the art, including (a) varying the thickness or composition of coating, (b) altering the amount or manner of addition of plasticizer in a coating, (c) including additional ingredients, such as release-modifying agents, (d) altering the composition, particle size or particle shape of the matrix, and (e) providing one or more passageways through the coating. The amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the method of administration (e.g., the site of implantation), the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
The matrix material, which itself may or may not serve a controlled-release function, is generally any material that supports the active ingredient(s). For example, a time delay material such as glyceryl monosterate or glyceryl distearate may be employed. Active ingredient(s) may be combined with matrix material prior to formation of the dosage form (e.g., a tablet). Alternatively, or in addition, active ingredient(s) may be coated on the surface of a particle, granule, sphere, microsphere, bead or pellet that comprises the matrix material. Such coating may be achieved by conventional means, such as by dissolving the active ingredient(s) in water or other suitable solvent and spraying. Optionally, additional ingredients are added prior to coating (e.g., to assist binding of the active ingredient(s) to the matrix material or to color the solution). The matrix may then be coated with a barrier agent prior to application of controlled-release coating. Multiple coated matrix units may, if desired, be encapsulated to generate the final dosage form.
In certain embodiments, a controlled release is achieved through the use of a controlled release coating (i.e., a coating that permits release of active ingredient(s) at a controlled rate in aqueous medium). The controlled release coating should be a strong, continuous film that is smooth, capable of supporting pigments and other additives, non-toxic, inert and tack-free. Coatings that regulate release of the modulator include pH-independent coatings, pH-dependent coatings (which may be used to release modulator in the stomach) and enteric coatings (which allow the formulation to pass intact through the stomach and into the small intestine, where the coating dissolves and the contents are absorbed by the body). It will be apparent that multiple coatings may be employed (e.g., to allow release of a portion of the dose in the stomach and a portion further along the gastrointestinal tract). For example, a portion of active ingredient(s) may be coated over an enteric coating, and thereby released in the stomach, while the remainder of active ingredient(s) in the matrix core is protected by the enteric coating and released further down the GI tract. pH dependent coatings include, for example, shellac, cellulose acetate phthalate, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate, methacrylic acid ester copolymers and zein.
In certain embodiments, the coating is a hydrophobic material, preferably used in an amount effective to slow the hydration of the gelling agent following administration. Suitable hydrophobic materials include alkyl celluloses (e.g., ethylcellulose or carboxymethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, acrylic polymers (e.g., poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxy ethyl methacrylates, cyanoethyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid alkamide copolymer, poly(methyl methacrylate), polyacrylamide, ammonio methacrylate copolymers, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly(methacrylic acid anhydride) and glycidyl methacrylate copolymers) and mixtures of the foregoing. Representative aqueous dispersions of ethylcellulose include, for example, AQUACOAT® (FMC Corp., Philadelphia, PA) and SURELEASE® (Colorcon, Inc., West Point, PA), both of which can be applied to the substrate according to the manufacturer's instructions. Representative acrylic polymers include, for example, the various EUDRAGIT® (Rohm America, Piscataway, NJ) polymers, which may be used singly or in combination depending on the desired release profile, according to the manufacturer's instructions.
The physical properties of coatings that comprise an aqueous dispersion of a hydrophobic material may be improved by the addition or one or more plasticizers. Suitable plasticizers for alkyl celluloses include, for example, dibutyl sebacate, diethyl phthalate, triethyl citrate, tributyl citrate and triacetin. Suitable plasticizers for acrylic polymers include, for example, citric acid esters such as triethyl citrate and tributyl citrate, dibutyl phthalate, polyethylene glycols, propylene glycol, diethyl phthalate, castor oil and triacetin.
Controlled-release coatings are generally applied using conventional techniques, such as by spraying in the form of an aqueous dispersion. If desired, the coating may comprise pores or channels or to facilitate release of active ingredient. Pores and channels may be generated by well known methods, including the addition of organic or inorganic material that is dissolved, extracted or leached from the coating in the environment of use. Certain such pore-forming materials include hydrophilic polymers, such as hydroxyalkylcelluloses (e.g., hydroxypropylmethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, synthetic water-soluble polymers (e.g., polyvinylpyrrolidone, cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone and polyethylene oxide), water- soluble polydextrose, saccharides and polysaccharides and alkali metal salts. Alternatively, or in addition, a controlled release coating may include one or more orifices, which may be formed my methods such as those described in US Patent Nos. 3,845,770; 4,034,758; 4,077,407; 4,088,864; 4,783,337 and 5,071,607. Controlled-release may also be achieved through the use of transdermal patches, using conventional technology (see, e.g., US Patent No. 4,668,232).
Further examples of controlled release formulations, and components thereof, may be found, for example, in US Patent Nos. 4,572,833; 4,587,117; 4,606,909; 4,610,870; 4,684,516; 4,777,049; 4,994,276; 4,996,058; 5,128,143; 5,202,128; 5,376,384; 5,384,133; 5,445,829; 5,510,119; 5,618,560; 5,643,604; 5,891,474; 5,958,456; 6,039,980; 6,143,353; 6,126,969; 6,156,342; 6,197,347; 6,387,394; 6,399,096; 6,437,000; 6,447,796; 6,475,493; 6,491,950; 6,524,615; 6,838,094; 6,905,709; 6,923,984; 6,923,988; and 6,911,217; each of which is hereby incorporated by reference for its teaching of the preparation of controlled release dosage forms.
In addition to or together with the above modes of administration, a compound provided herein may be conveniently added to food or drinking water (e.g., for administration to non-human animals including companion animals (such as dogs and cats) and livestock). Animal feed and drinking water compositions may be formulated so that the animal takes in an appropriate quantity of the composition along with its diet. It may also be convenient to present the composition as a premix for addition to feed or drinking water. Compounds are generally administered in a therapeutically effective amount.
Preferred systemic doses are no higher than 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day (e.g., ranging from about 0.001 mg to about 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day), with oral doses generally being about 5-20 fold higher than intravenous doses (e.g., ranging from 0.01 to 40 mg per kilogram of body weight per day). The amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage unit will vary depending, for example, upon the patient being treated, the particular mode of administration and any other co-administered drugs. Dosage units generally contain between from about 10 μg to about 500 mg of active ingredient. Optimal dosages may be established using routine testing, and procedures that are well known in the art.
Pharmaceutical compositions may be packaged for treating conditions responsive to VRl modulation (e.g., treatment of exposure to vanilloid ligand or other irritant, pain, itch, obesity or urinary incontinence). Packaged pharmaceutical compositions generally include (i) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one VRl modulator as described herein and (ii) instructions (e.g., labeling or a package insert) indicating that the contained composition is to be used for treating a condition responsive to VRl modulation in the patient.
METHODS OF USE
VRl modulators provided herein may be used to alter activity and/or activation of capsaicin receptors in a variety of contexts, both in vitro and in vivo. Within certain aspects, VRl antagonists may be used to inhibit the binding of vanilloid ligand agonist (such as capsaicin and/or RTX) to capsaicin receptor in vitro or in vivo. In general, such methods comprise the step of contacting a capsaicin receptor with one or more VRl modulators provided herein, in the presence of vanilloid ligand in aqueous solution and under conditions otherwise suitable for binding of the ligand to capsaicin receptor. The VRl modulator(s) are generally present at a concentration that is sufficient to alter the binding of vanilloid ligand to
VRl in vitro (using the assay provided in Example 5) and/or VRl -mediated signal transduction (using an assay provided in Example 6). The capsaicin receptor may be present in solution or suspension (e.g., in an isolated membrane or cell preparation), or in a cultured or isolated cell. Within certain embodiments, the capsaicin receptor is expressed by a neuronal cell present in a patient, and the aqueous solution is a body fluid. Preferably, one or more VRl modulators are administered to an animal in an amount such that the VRl modulator is present in at least one body fluid of the animal at a therapeutically effective concentration that is 5 micromolar or less; preferably 1 micromolar or less; more preferably 100 nanomolar or less. For example, such compounds may be administered at a therapeutically effective dose that is less than 20 mg/kg body weight, preferably less than 5 mg/kg and, in some instances, less than 1 mg/kg.
Also provided herein are methods for modulating, preferably reducing, the signal- transducing activity (i.e., the calcium conductance) of a cellular capsaicin receptor. Such modulation may be achieved by contacting a capsaicin receptor (either in vitro or in vivo) with one or more VRl modulators provided herein under conditions suitable for binding of the modulator(s) to the receptor. The VRl modulator(s) are generally present at a concentration that is sufficient to alter the binding of vanilloid ligand to VRl in vitro and/or VRl -mediated signal transduction as described herein. The receptor may be present in solution or suspension, in a cultured or isolated cell preparation or in a cell within a patient. For example, the cell may be a neuronal cell that is contacted in vivo in an animal. Alternatively, the cell may be an epithelial cell, such as a urinary bladder epithelial cell (urothelial cell) or an airway epithelial cell that is contacted in vivo in an animal. Modulation of signal tranducing activity may be assessed by detecting an effect on calcium ion conductance (also referred to as calcium mobilization or flux). Modulation of signal transducing activity may alternatively be assessed by detecting an alteration of a symptom (e.g., pain, burning sensation, broncho-constriction, inflammation, cough, hiccup, itch, urinary incontinence or overactive bladder) of a patient being treated with one or more VRl modulators provided herein. VRl modulator(s) provided herein are preferably administered to a patient (e.g., a human) orally or topically, and are present within at least one body fluid of the animal while modulating VRl signal-transducing activity. Preferred VRl modulators for use in such methods modulate VRl signal-transducing activity in vitro at a concentration of 1 nanomolar or less, preferably 100 picomolar or less, more preferably 20 picomolar or less, and in vivo at a concentration of 1 micromolar or less, 500 nanomolar or less, or 100 nanomolar or less in a body fluid such as blood.
The present invention further provides methods for treating conditions responsive to VRl modulation. Within the context of the present invention, the term "treatment" encompasses both disease-modifying treatment and symptomatic treatment, either of which may be prophylactic (i.e., before the onset of symptoms, in order to prevent, delay or reduce the severity of symptoms) or therapeutic (i.e., after the onset of symptoms, in order to reduce the severity and/or duration of symptoms). A condition is "responsive to VRl modulation" if it is characterized by inappropriate activity of a capsaicin receptor, regardless of the amount of vanilloid ligand present locally, and/or if modulation of capsaicin receptor activity results in alleviation of the condition or a symptom thereof. Such conditions include, for example, symptoms resulting from exposure to VRl -activating stimuli, pain, respiratory disorders (such as cough, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic bronchitis, cystic fibrosis and rhinitis, including allergic rhinitis, such as seasonal an perennial rhinitis, and non-allergic rhinitis), depression, itch, urinary incontinence, overactive bladder, diabetes and prediabetic conditions (e.g., insulin resistance or glucose tolerance), hiccup and obesity, as described in more detail below. Such conditions may be diagnosed and monitored using criteria that have been established in the art. Patients may include humans, domesticated companion animals and livestock, with dosages as described above. Treatment regimens may vary depending on the compound used and the particular condition to be treated; however, for treatment of most disorders, a frequency of administration of 4 times daily or less is preferred. In general, a dosage regimen of 2 times daily is more preferred, with once a day dosing particularly preferred. For the treatment of acute pain, a single dose that rapidly reaches effective concentrations is desirable. It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion, drug combination and the severity of the particular disease undergoing therapy. In general, the use of the minimum dose sufficient to provide effective therapy is preferred. Patients may generally be monitored for therapeutic effectiveness using medical or veterinary criteria suitable for the condition being treated or prevented.
Patients experiencing symptoms resulting from exposure to capsaicin receptor- activating stimuli include individuals with burns caused by heat, light, tear gas or acid and those whose mucous membranes are exposed (e.g., via ingestion, inhalation or eye contact) to capsaicin (e.g., from hot peppers or in pepper spray) or a related irritant such as acid, tear gas, infectious agent(s) or air pollutant(s). The resulting symptoms (which may be treated using VRl modulators, especially antagonists, provided herein) may include, for example, pain, broncho-constriction and inflammation. Pain that may be treated using the VRl modulators provided herein may be chronic or acute and includes, but is not limited to, peripheral nerve-mediated pain (especially neuropathic pain). Compounds provided herein may be used in the treatment of, for example, postmastectomy pain syndrome, stump pain, phantom limb pain, oral neuropathic pain, toothache (dental pain), denture pain, postherpetic neuralgia, diabetic neuropathy, chemotherapy-induced neuropathy, reflex sympathetic dystrophy, trigeminal neuralgia, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, fibromyalgia, Guillain-Barre syndrome, meralgia paresthetica, burning-mouth syndrome and/or pain associated with nerve and root damage, including as pain associated with peripheral nerve disorders (e.g., nerve entrapment and brachial plexus avulsions, amputation, peripheral neuropathies including bilateral peripheral neuropathy, tic douloureux, atypical facial pain, nerve root damage, and arachnoiditis). Additional neuropathic pain conditions include causalgia (reflex sympathetic dystrophy - RSD, secondary to injury of a peripheral nerve), neuritis (including, for example, sciatic neuritis, peripheral neuritis, polyneuritis, optic neuritis, postfebrile neuritis, migrating neuritis, segmental neuritis and Gombault's neuritis), neuronitis, neuralgias (e.g., those mentioned above, cervicobrachial neuralgia, cranial neuralgia, geniculate neuralgia, glossopharyngial neuralgia, migranous neuralgia, idiopathic neuralgia, intercostals neuralgia, mammary neuralgia, mandibular joint neuralgia, Morton's neuralgia, nasociliary neuralgia, occipital neuralgia, red neuralgia, Sluder's neuralgia, splenopalatine neuralgia, supraorbital neuralgia and vidian neuralgia), surgery-related pain, musculoskeletal pain, myofascial pain syndromes, AIDS-related neuropathy, MS-related neuropathy, central nervous system pain (e.g., pain due to brain stem damage, sciatica, and ankylosing spondylitis), and spinal pain, including spinal cord injury-related pain. Headache, including headaches involving peripheral nerve activity may also be treated as described herein. Such pain includes, for example, such as sinus, cluster (i.e., migranous neuralgia) and tension headaches, migraine, temporomandibular pain and maxillary sinus pain. For example, migraine headaches may be prevented by administration of a compound provided herein as soon as a pre-migrainous aura is experienced by the patient. Further conditions that can be treated as described herein include Charcot's pains, intestinal gas pains, ear pain, heart pain, muscle pain, eye pain, orofacial pain (e.g., odontalgia), abdominal pain, gynaecological pain (e.g., menstrual pain, dysmenorrhoea, pain associated with cystitis, labor pain, chronic pelvic pain, chronic prostitis and endometriosis), acute and chronic back pain (e.g., lower back pain), gout, scar pain, hemorrhoidal pain, dyspeptic pains, angina, nerve root pain, "non-painful" neuropathies, complex regional pain syndrome, homotopic pain and heterotopic pain - including pain associated with carcinoma, often referred to as cancer pain (e.g., in patients with bone cancer), pain (and inflammation) associated with venom exposure (e.g., due to snake bite, spider bite, or insect sting) and trauma associated pain (e.g., post-surgical pain, episiotomy pain, pain from cuts, musculoskeletal pain, bruises and broken bones, and burn pain, especially primary hyperalgesia associated therewith). Additional pain conditions that may be treated as described herein include pain associated with respiratory disorders as described above, autoimmune diseases, immunodeficiency disorders, hot flashes, inflammatory bowel disease, gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD), irritable bowel syndrome and/or inflammatory bowel disease.
Within certain aspects, VRl modulators provided herein may be used for the treatment of mechanical pain. As used herein, the term "mechanical pain" refers to pain other than headache pain that is not neuropathic or a result of exposure to heat, cold or external chemical stimuli. Mechanical pain includes physical trauma (other than thermal or chemical burns or other irritating and/or painful exposures to noxious chemicals) such as post-surgical pain and pain from cuts, bruises and broken bones; toothache; denture pain; nerve root pain; osteoarthritis; rheumatoid arthritis; fibromyalgia; meralgia paresthetica; back pain; cancer- associated pain; angina; carpel tunnel syndrome; and pain resulting from bone fracture, labor, hemorrhoids, intestinal gas, dyspepsia, and menstruation.
Itching conditions that may be treated include psoriatic pruritus, itch due to hemodialysis, aguagenic pruritus, and itching associated with vulvar vestibulitis, contact dermatitis, insect bites and skin allergies. Urinary tract conditions that may be treated as described herein include urinary incontinence (including overflow incontinence, urge incontinence and stress incontinence), as well as overactive or unstable bladder conditions (including bladder detrusor hyper-reflexia, detrusor hyper-reflexia of spinal origin and bladder hypersensitivity). In certain such treatment methods, VRl modulator is administered via a catheter or similar device, resulting in direct injection of VRl modulator into the bladder. Compounds provided herein may also be used as anti-tussive agents (to prevent, relieve or suppress coughing, including cough induced by medications such as ACE inhibitors) and for the treatment of hiccup, for the treatment of menopause symptoms such as hot flashes, and to promote weight loss in an obese patient.
Within other aspects, VRl modulators provided herein may be used within combination therapy for the treatment of conditions involving pain and/or inflammatory components. Such conditions include, for example, autoimmune disorders and pathologic autoimmune responses known to have an inflammatory component including, but not limited to, arthritis (especially rheumatoid arthritis), psoriasis, Crohn's disease, lupus erythematosus, irritable bowel syndrome, tissue graft rejection, and hyperacute rejection of transplanted organs. Other such conditions include trauma (e.g., injury to the head or spinal cord), cardio- and cerebro-vascular disease and certain infectious diseases.
Within such combination therapy, a VRl modulator is administered to a patient along with an analgesic and/or anti-inflammatory agent. The VRl modulator and analgesic and/or anti-inflammatory agent may be present in the same pharmaceutical composition, or may be administered separately in either order. Anti-inflammatory agents include, for example, nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), non-specific and cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2) specific cyclooxgenase enzyme inhibitors, gold compounds, corticosteroids, methotrexate, tumor necrosis factor (TNF) receptor antagonists, anti-TNF alpha antibodies, anti-C5 antibodies, and interleukin-1 (IL-I) receptor antagonists. Examples of NSAIDs include, but are not limited to ibuprofen, flurbiprofen, naproxen or naproxen sodium, diclofenac, combinations of diclofenac sodium and misoprostol, sulindac, oxaprozin, diflunisal, piroxicam, indomethacin, etodolac, fenoprofen calcium, ketoprofen, sodium nabumetone, sulfasalazine, tolmetin sodium, and hydroxychloroquine. One class of NSAIDs consists of compounds that inhibit cyclooxygenase (COX) enzymes; such compounds include celecoxib and rofecoxib. NSAIDs further include salicylates such as acetylsalicylic acid or aspirin, sodium salicylate, choline and magnesium salicylates, and salsalate, as well as corticosteroids such as cortisone, dexamethasone, methylprednisolone, prednisolone, prednisolone sodium phosphate, and prednisone. Further anti-inflammatory agents include meloxicam, etoricoxib, parecoxib, valdecoxib and tilicoxib. Suitable dosages for VRl modulator within a combination therapy are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of anti-inflammatory agents can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference. In certain embodiments, the combination administration of a VRl modulator with an antiinflammatory agent results in a reduction of the dosage of the anti-inflammatory agent required to produce a therapeutic effect (i.e., a decrease in the minimum therapeutically effective amount). Thus, preferably, the dosage of anti-inflammatory agent in a combination or combination treatment method is less than the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the anti-inflammatory agent without combination administration of a VRl antagonist. More preferably this dosage is less than 3A, even more preferably less than Vi, and highly preferably, less than !4 of the maximum dose, while most preferably the dose is less than 10% of the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the anti-inflammatory agent(s) when administered without combination administration of a VRl antagonist. It will be apparent that the dosage amount of VRl antagonist component of the combination needed to achieve the desired effect may similarly be affected by the dosage amount and potency of the anti-inflammatory agent component of the combination.
In certain preferred embodiments, the combination administration of a VRl modulator with an anti-inflammatory agent is accomplished by packaging one or more VRl modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents in the same package, either in separate containers within the package or in the same contained as a mixture of one or more VRl antagonists and one or more anti-inflammatory agents. Preferred mixtures are formulated for oral administration (e.g., as pills, capsules, tablets or the like). In certain embodiments, the package comprises a label bearing indicia indicating that the one or more VRl modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents are to be taken together for the treatment of an inflammatory pain condition. Within further aspects, VRl modulators provided herein may be used in combination with one or more additional pain relief medications. Certain such medications are also anti- inflammatory agents, and are listed above. Other such medications are analgesic agents, including narcotic agents which typically act at one or more opioid receptor subtypes (e.g., μ, K and/or δ), preferably as agonists or partial agonists. Such agents include opiates, opiate derivatives and opioids, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates thereof. Specific examples of narcotic analgesics include, within preferred embodiments, alfentanil, alphaprodine, anileridine, bezitramide, buprenorphine, butorphanol, codeine, diacetyldihydromorphine, diacetylmorphine, dihydrocodeine, diphenoxylate, ethylmorphine, fentanyl, heroin, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, isomethadone, levomethorphan, levorphane, levorphanol, meperidine, metazocine, methadone, methorphan, metopon, morphine, nalbuphine, opium extracts, opium fluid extracts, powdered opium, granulated opium, raw opium, tincture of opium, oxycodone, oxymorphone, paregoric, pentazocine, pethidine, phenazocine, piminodine, propoxyphene, racemethorphan, racemorphan, sulfentanyl, thebaine and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates of the foregoing agents. Other examples of narcotic analgesic agents include acetorphine, acetyldihydrocodeine, acetylmethadol, allylprodine, alphracetylmethadol, alphameprodine, alphamethadol, benzethidine, benzylmorphine, betacetylmethadol, betameprodine, betamethadol, betaprodine, clonitazene, codeine methylbromide, codeine-N-oxide, cyprenorphine, desomorphine, dextromoramide, diampromide, diethylthiambutene, dihydromorphine, dimenoxadol, dimepheptanol, dimethylthiamubutene, dioxaphetyl butyrate, dipipanone, drotebanol, ethanol, ethylmethylthiambutene, etonitazene, etoφhine, etoxeridine, furethidine, hydromoφhinol, hydroxypethidine, ketobemidone, levomoramide, levophenacylmorphan, methyldesoφhine, methyldihydromoφhine, moφheridine, moφhine methylpromide, moφhine methylsulfonate, moφhine-N-oxide, myrophin, naloxone, naltyhexone, nicocodeine, nicomoφhine, noracymethadol, norlevoφhanol, normethadone, normoφhine, noφipanone, pentazocaine, phenadoxone, phenampromide, phenomoφhan, phenoperidine, piritramide, pholcodine, proheptazoine, properidine, propiran, racemoramide, thebacon, trimeperidine and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates thereof.
Further specific representative analgesic agents include, for example acetaminophen (paracetamol); aspirin and other NSAIDs described above; NR2B antagonists; bradykinin antagonists; anti-migraine agents; anticonvulsants such as oxcarbazepine and carbamazepine; antidepressants (such as TCAs, SSRIs, SNRIs, substance P antagonists, etc.); spinal blocks; pentazocine/naloxone; meperidine; levoφhanol; buprenoφhine; hydromoφhone; fentanyl; sufentanyl; oxycodone; oxycodone/acetaminophen, nalbuphine and oxymoφhone. Still further analgesic agents include CB2-receptor agonists, such as AM 1241, capsaicin receptor antagonists and compounds that bind to the α2δ subunit of voltage-gated calcium channels, such as gabapentin and pregabalin.
Representative anti-migraine agents for use in combination with a VRl modulator provided herein include CGRP antagonists, ergotamines and 5-HTi agonists, such as sumatripan, naratriptan, zolmatriptan and rizatriptan.
Within still further aspects, modulators provided herein may be used, for example, in the treatment of pulmonary disorders such as asthma, in combination with one or more beta(2)-adrenergic receptor agonists or leukotriene receptor antagonists (e.g., agents that inhibits the cysteinyl leukotriene CysLTi receptor). CysLTi antagonists include montelukast, zafirlukast, and pranlukast.
For the treatment or prevention of cough, a VRl modulator as provided herein may be used in combination with other medication designed to treat this condition, such as antibiotics, anti-inflammatory agents, cystinyl leukotrienes, histamine antagonists, corticosteroids, opioids, NMDA antagonists, proton pump inhibitors, nociceptin, neurokinin (NKl, NK2 and NK3) and bradykinin (BKl and BK2) receptor antagonists, cannabinoids, blockers of Na+- dependent channels and large conductance Ca+2-dependent K+-channel activators. Specific agents include dexbrompheniramine plus pseudoephedrine, loratadine, oxymetazoline, ipratropium, albuterol, beclomethasone, moφhine, codeine, pholcodeine and dextromethoφhan. The present invention further provides combination therapy for the treatment of urinary incontinence. Within such aspects, a VRl modulator provided herein may be used in combination with other medication designed to treat this condition, such as estrogen replacement therapy, progesterone congeners, electrical stimulation, calcium channel blockers, antispasmodic agents, cholinergic antagonists, antimuscarinic drugs, tricyclic antidepressants, SNRIs, beta adrenoceptor agonists, phosphodiesterase inhibitors, potassium channel openers, nociceptin/orphanin FQ (OP4) agonists, neurokinin (NKl and NK2) antagonists, P2X3 antagonists, musculotrophic drugs and sacral neuromodulation. Specific agents include oxybutinin, emepronium, tolterodine, flavoxate, flurbiprofen, tolterodine, dicyclomine, propiverine, propantheline, dicyclomine, imipramine, doxepin, duloxetine, 1- deamino-8-D-arginine vasopressin, muscarinic receptor antagonists such as tolterodine and anticholinergic agents such as oxybutynin.
Suitable dosages for VRl modulator within such combination therapy are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of other pain relief medications can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference. In certain embodiments, the combination administration of a VRl modulator with one or more additional pain medications results in a reduction of the dosage of each therapeutic agent required to produce a therapeutic effect {e.g., the dosage or one or both agent may less than VA, less than V-, less than !4 or less than 10% of the maximum dose listed above or advised by the manufacturer).
For use in combination therapy, pharmaceutical compositions as described above may further comprise one or more additional medications as described above. In certain such compositions, the additional medication is an analgesic. Also provided herein are packaged pharmaceutical preparations comprising one or more VRl modulators and one or more additional medications {e.g., analgesics) in the same package. Such packaged pharmaceutical preparations generally include (i) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one VRl modulator as described herein; (ii) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one additional medication (such as a pain relief and/or anti-inflammatory medication) as described above and (iii) instructions {e.g., labeling or a package insert) indicating that the compositions are to be used simultaneously, separately or sequentially for treating or preventing a condition responsive to VRl modulation in the patient (such as a condition in which pain and/or inflammation predominates).
Compounds that are VRl agonists may further be used, for example, in crowd control (as a substitute for tear gas) or personal protection {e.g., in a spray formulation) or as pharmaceutical agents for the treatment of pain, itch, urinary incontinence or overactive bladder via capsaicin receptor desensitization. In general, compounds for use in crowd control or personal protection are formulated and used according to conventional tear gas or pepper spray technology.
Within separate aspects, the present invention provides a variety of non- pharmaceutical in vitro and in vivo uses for the compounds provided herein. For example, such compounds may be labeled and used as probes for the detection and localization of capsaicin receptor (in samples such as cell preparations or tissue sections, preparations or fractions thereof). In addition, compounds provided herein that comprise a suitable reactive group (such as an aryl carbonyl, nitro or azide group) may be used in photoaffinity labeling studies of receptor binding sites. In addition, compounds provided herein may be used as positive controls in assays for receptor activity, as standards for determining the ability of a candidate agent to bind to capsaicin receptor, or as radiotracers for positron emission tomography (PET) imaging or for single photon emission computerized tomography (SPECT). Such methods can be used to characterize capsaicin receptors in living subjects. For example, a VRl modulator may be labeled using any of a variety of well known techniques {e.g., radiolabeled with a radionuclide such as tritium, as described herein), and incubated with a sample for a suitable incubation time (e.g., determined by first assaying a time course of binding). Following incubation, unbound compound is removed (e.g., by washing), and bound compound detected using any method suitable for the label employed (e.g., autoradiography or scintillation counting for radiolabeled compounds; spectroscopic methods may be used to detect luminescent groups and fluorescent groups). As a control, a matched sample containing labeled compound and a greater (e.g., 10-fold greater) amount of unlabeled compound may be processed in the same manner. A greater amount of detectable label remaining in the test sample than in the control indicates the presence of capsaicin receptor in the sample. Detection assays, including receptor autoradiography (receptor mapping) of capsaicin receptor in cultured cells or tissue samples may be performed as described by Kuhar in sections 8.1.1 to 8.1.9 of Current Protocols in Pharmacology (1998) John Wiley & Sons, New York.
Compounds provided herein may also be used within a variety of well known cell separation methods. For example, modulators may be linked to the interior surface of a tissue culture plate or other support, for use as affinity ligands for immobilizing and thereby isolating, capsaicin receptors (e.g., isolating receptor-expressing cells) in vitro. Within one preferred embodiment, a modulator linked to a fluorescent marker, such as fluorescein, is contacted with the cells, which are then analyzed (or isolated) by fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS). VRl modulators provided herein may further be used within assays for the identification of other agents that bind to capsaicin receptor. In general, such assays are standard competition binding assays, in which bound, labeled VRl modulator is displaced by a test compound. Briefly, such assays are performed by: (a) contacting capsaicin receptor with a radiolabeled VRl modulator as described herein, under conditions that permit binding of the VRl modulator to capsaicin receptor, thereby generating bound, labeled VRl modulator; (b) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled VRl modulator in the absence of test agent; (c) contacting the bound, labeled VRl modulator with a test agent; (d) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound labeled VRl modulator in the presence of test agent; and (e) detecting a decrease in signal detected in step (d), as compared to the signal detected in step (b).
The following Examples are offered by way of illustration and not by way of limitation. Unless otherwise specified all reagents and solvent are of standard commercial grade and are used without further purification. Using routine modifications, the starting materials may be varied and additional steps employed to produce other compounds provided herein.
EXAMPLES
Mass spectroscopy data in the following Examples is Electrospray MS, obtained in positive ion mode using a Micromass Time-of-Flight LCT (Waters Corp.; Milford, MA), equipped with a Waters 600 pump (Waters Corp.; Milford, MA), Waters 996 photodiode array detector (Waters Corp.; Milford, MA), and a Gilson 215 autosampler (Gilson, Inc.; Middleton, WI). MassLynx™ (Waters Corp.; Milford, MA) version 4.0 software with OpenLynx Global Server™, OpenLynx™ and AutoLynx™ processing is used for data collection and analysis. MS conditions are as follows: capillary voltage = 3.5 kV; cone voltage = 30 V, desolvation and source temperature = 35O0C and 1200C, respectively; mass range = 181-750 with a scan time of 0.22 seconds and an interscan delay of 0.05 seconds.
Sample volume of 1 microliter is injected onto a 50x4.6mm Chromolith SpeedROD RP- 18e column (Merck KGaA, Darmstadt, Germany), and eluted using a 2-phase linear gradient at a flow rate of 6 ml/min. Sample is detected using total absorbance count over the 220-340nm UV range. The elution conditions are: Mobile Phase A - 95% water, 5% MeOH with 0.05% TFA; Mobile Phase B - 5% water, 95% MeOH with 0.025% TFA. The following gradient is used: 0-0.5 min 10-100%B, hold at 100%B to 1.2 min, return to 10%B at 1.21 min. Inject to inject cycle is 2.15 min. The determined molecular weight (MS) is provided as M+l, with retention times (R1-) given in minutes. The IC50 determined as described in Example 6 is 1 micromolar or less for compounds 1-10, 12-16 and 18-20.
EXAMPLE 1 Preparation of Representative Substituted Pyrimidinones
This Example illustrates the preparation of substituted pyrimidinones.
A. 3-("4-Chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyllpyrimidin-4(3H)-one (Compound 1)
1. Methyl 3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)but-2-enoate
Figure imgf000043_0001
To a solution of methyl 3-aminocrotonate (1.38 g, 12.0 mmol) in pyridine (10 mL) and CHCI3 (30 mL) add 4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexanecarbonyl chloride (2.14 g, 10 mmol). Heat the mixture to reflux for overnight, cool to RT, concentrate, and partition between EtOAc and water. Wash the organic layer with 6 M HCl, H2O and brine. Dry over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum. Purify using flash chromatography (25% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
2. 3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one (cmpd 1)
Figure imgf000043_0002
To a solution of 4-chloroaniline (1.83 g, 14.3 mmol) in DCE (30 mL) under nitrogen add timethylaluminum (2 M in hexane, 7.2 mL, 14.3 mmol). Stir the mixture at RT for 30 min and add a solution of methyl 3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)-cyclohexanecarboxamido)but-2- enoate (2.8 g, 9.55 mmol) in DCE (10 mL). Stir the mixture at 900C for overnight, cool to RT, quench with saturated Rochelle's salt, and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using flash chromatography (25% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. MS (M+l) = 371.06; Rγ = 1 25 min. B. 5-Bromo-3-(4-chlorophenylV6-methyl-2-rcis-4-(trifluoromethvπcvclohexyl]-pyrimidin-
4(3HVone (Compound 2)
Figure imgf000044_0001
To a solution of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifiuoromethyl)- cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (2.5 g, 6.71 mmol) in HOAc (30 mL) add Br2 (2.2 g, 13.48 mmol). Stir the mixture at RT for overnight, dilute with H2O, and collect the solid. Purify using flash chromatography (10% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
MS (M+l) = 451.07; Rx = 1.35 min.
C. 3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-5,6-dimethyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethvπcyclohexyl1pyrimidin-4(3H)- one (Compound 3)
Figure imgf000044_0002
To a de-gassed mixture of 5-bromo-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (100 mg, 0.22 mmol) and timethylaluminum (2 M in hexane, 0.33 mL, 0.66 mmol) in THF (6 mL) under nitrogen add Pd(PPh3)4 (27 mg, 0.022 mmol). Stir the mixture at 80°C for overnight, cool to RT, quench with saturated Rochelle's salt, and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum. Purify using preparative TLC plates (1000 micron/ 15% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. MS (M+l) = 385.20; Rτ = 1.35 min.
D. 3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-5-ethyl-6-methyl-2-rcis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyllpyrimidin- 4(3H)-one (Compound 4)
Figure imgf000044_0003
To a de-gassed mixture of 5-bromo-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (100 mg, 0.22 mmol), BEt3 (1 M in Hexane, 0.67 mL, 0.67 mmol), and 2 M K3PO4 (0.33 mL, 0.67 mmol), in toluene (5 mL) add Pd(PPh3)4 (26 mg, 0.022 mmol). Heat the reaction for 16 h at 1000C. Cool the reaction, concentrate, and partition between EtOAc and water. Dry over Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using preparative TLC plates (1000 micron/ 25% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. MS (M+l) = 399.22; Rτ = 1.37 min.
E. 3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-5-cvclopropyl-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyll- pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (Compound 5)
Figure imgf000045_0001
To a de-gassed mixture of 5-bromo-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (100 mg, 0.22 mmol), cyclopropylboronic acid (38 mg, 0.44 mmol), K3PO4 (170 mg, 0.80 mmol), and tricyclohexylphosphine (6 mg, 0.022mml) in toluene-water (4 mL/0.2 mL) add Pd(OAc)2 (3 mg, 0.011 mmol). Heat the mixture for 16 h at 1000C. Cool the reaction, concentrate, and partition between EtOAc and water. Dry over Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using preparative TLC plates (1000 micron/ 25% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. MS (M+l) = 411.21 ; Rx = 1.38 min.
F. 1 -(4-Chlorophenyl)-4-methyl-6-oxo-2-f cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyn- 1 ,6- dihvdropyrimidine-5-carbonitrile (Compound 6)
Figure imgf000045_0002
To a de-gassed mixture of 5-bromo-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (100 mg, 0.22 mmol) and Zn(CN)2 (16 mg,
0.13 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) add Pd(PPh3)4 (26 mg, 0.022 mmol). Heat the reaction for 16 h at 1000C. Cool the reaction, concentrate, and partition between EtOAc and water. Dry over
Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using preparative TLC plates (1000 micron/
25% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. MS (M+l) = 396.19; Rx = 1.3 min. G. 5-Acetyl-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-rcis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyl1-pyrimidin-
4(3H)-one (Compound 7)
Figure imgf000046_0001
To a de-gassed mixture of 5-bromo-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (100 mg, 0.22 mmol) and tributyl(l- ethoxyvinyl)tin (97 mg, 0.27 mmol) in toluene (5 mL) add Pd(PPh3)4 (26 mg, 0.022 mmol).
Heat the reaction for 16 h at 1200C. Cool the reaction, concentrate, partition between EtOAc and water, and wash with saturated KF solution. Dry over Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum. Add MeOH (20 mL) and 3 M HCl (4 mL) and stir the mixture at RT for 30 minutes. Concentrate under vacuum and partition between EtOAc and saturated NaHCO3. Dry over
Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using preparative TLC plates (1000 micron/
15% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. MS (M+l) = 413.12; RT = 1.31 min.
H. 5-Chloro-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyll-pyrimidin- 4(3H)-one (Compound 8)
Figure imgf000046_0002
To a solution of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)- cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (100 mg, 0.22 mmol) in HOAc (10 mL) add NCS (43 mg,
0.32 mmol). Heat the reaction for 2 h at 75°C. Cool the reaction, dilute with H2O, and collect the solid. Purify using preparative TLC plates (1000 micron 10% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. MS (M+l) = 405.19; Rx = 1.35 min.
I. 3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-5-fluoro-6-methyl-2-rcis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyl1pyrimidin- 4(3H)-one (Compound 9)
Figure imgf000046_0003
To a solution of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyi)- cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (100 mg, 0.22 mmol) in acetonitrile (10 mL) add SELECTFLUOR™ (234 mg, 0.66 mmol). Heat the reaction for 16 h at 110°C in a sealed tube. Cool the reaction mixture, dilute with H2O, extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using preparative TLC plates (1000 micron 25% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. MS (M+l) = 389.20; Rj = 1 32 min.
J. 3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-6-(2-hvdroxyethyl)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyn-pyrimidin- 4(3H)-one (Compound 10)
1. Methyl 3-amino-5-methoxypent-2-enoate
NH2 O MeO^^^^O^
To a solution of 5-methoxy 3-oxovaleric acid methyl ester (2.0 g, 12.5 mmol) in MeOH (40 mL) add NH4OAc (3.85 g, 50 mmol). Heat the mixture for 16 h at 50°C in sealed tube. Cool to RT; add 2.0 eq. Of NH3-H2O, dilute with H2O, and extract with ether. Dry over Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum to give the title compound. 2. Methyl 5-methoxy-3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)pent-2-enoate
Figure imgf000047_0001
This compound is prepared essentially according to the procedure described in Example 1 A.
3. 3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-6-(2-methoxyethyl)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]- pyrimidin-4(3H)-one
Figure imgf000047_0002
This compound is prepared essentially according to the procedure described in Example 1 A. MS (M+l) = 415.22; Rτ = 1.17 min.
4. 3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-6-(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-[cis-4-(triβuoromethyl)cyclohexylJ- pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cmpd 10)
Figure imgf000048_0001
To a cooled solution (-780C) of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(2-methoxyethyl)-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]-pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (46 mg, 0.11 mmol) in DCE (10 mL) under nitrogen add BBr3 (1 M in DCM, 0.22 mL, 0.22 mmol). Bring the reaction mixture to RT and stir at RT for 1 h. Quench with saturated NaHCO3, separate the organic layer, dry over Na2SO4, and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using preparative TLC plates (1000 micron 25% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. MS (M+ 1) = 401.20; RT = 1.15 min.
K. 6-(Aminomethyl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-rcis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyllpyrimidin- 4(3H)-one (Compound 1 1)
1. {1 -(4-Chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-fcis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexylJ -1 , 6- dihydropyrimidin-4-ylmethyl} methane sulfonate
Figure imgf000048_0002
To a cool solution (00C) of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(hydroxymethyl)-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (prepared essentially according to the procedure described in Example 1 J; 200 mg, 0.52 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) add methanesulfonyl chloride (48 μL, 0.62 mmol) and TEA (144 μL, 1.03 mmol). Stir the mixture at RT for 1 h; dilute with DCM, and wash with H2O and brine. Dry over MgSO4 and concentrate under vacuum to give the title compound. 2. 6-(Azidomethyl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]-pyrimidin-
4(3H)-one
Figure imgf000048_0003
To a solution of {l-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]-l,6- dihydropyrimidin-4-ylmethyl} methane sulfonate (480 mg, 1.03 mmol) in DMSO (10 mL) add NaN3 (134 mg, 2.06 mmol). Heat the mixture for 2 h at 500C. Cool to RT; dilute with
H2O, and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using preparative TLC plates (1000 micron 25% EtOAc/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
3. 6-(Aminomethyl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]-pyrimidin- 4(3H)-one (cmpd 11)
Figure imgf000049_0001
To a solution of 6-(azidomethyl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)- cyclohexyl]-pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (100 mg, 0.26 mmol) in 8 M NH3-MeOH (40 mL) add 10%
Pd-C (100 mg). Hydrogenate at 45 psi for 3 h. Filter and concentrate. Purify using preparative TLC plates (1000 micron 5% MeOH/DCM eluent) to give the title compound.
MS (M+l) = 386.23; Rτ = 1.18 min.
L. 6-Amino-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-[cis-4-('trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyl1pyrimidin-4(3H)-one hydrochloride (Compound 12)
1. l-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-fcis-4-(triβuoromethyl)cyclohexylJ-l, 6- dihydropyrimidine-4-carbaldehyde
Figure imgf000049_0002
To a cool solution (00C) of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(hydroxymethyl)-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (prepared essentially according to the procedure described in Example 1 J; 500 mg, 1.29 mmol) in DCM (30 mL) add Dess-Martin periodinane (l,l,l-Tris(acetyloxy)-l,l-dihydro-l,2-benziodoxol-3(lH)-one) (1.1 g, 2.6 mmol). Stir the mixture at RT for 24 h. Quench with saturated Na2S2O3 and wash with sat NaHCO3. Dry over Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum. Purify with flash column (25% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
2. l-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-fcis-4-(triβuoromethyl)cyclohexylJ-l,6- dihydropyrimidine-4-carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000050_0001
To a solution of l-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]-l,6- dihydropyrimidine-4-carbaldehyde (385 mg, 1.0 mmol) in THF-tert-BuOH (8 mL/24 mL) add 2-methyl-2-butene (8 mL) and a solution of NaClO2 and KH2PO4 in H2O (8 mL). Stir the mixture at RT for 16 h. Concentrate and extract with DCM. Dry over MgSO4 and concentrate under vacuum to give the title compound.
3. tert-Butyl {l-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]-l, 6- dihydropyrimidin-4-yl} carbamate
Figure imgf000050_0002
Reflux a mixture of l-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)-cyclohexyl]- l,6-dihydropyrimidine-4-carboxylic acid (750 mg, 1.87 mmol), DPPA (524 μL, 2.43 mmol), and TEA (339 μL, 2.43 mmol) in tert-BuOU (20 mL) for 16h. Cool to RT and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using flash column (15% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. 4. 6-Amino-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one hydrochloride (cmpd 12)
Figure imgf000050_0003
Stir a mixture of tert-buty\ {l-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]-l,6-dihydropyrimidin-4-yl} carbamate (140 mg, 0.30 mmol) in 4M HCl-dioxane (8 mL) at 500C for 30 min. Concentrate and collect the solid from ether to give the title compound. MS (M+l) = 372.10; Rτ = 1.45 min.
M. 3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-6-(methylamino)-2-rcis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyHpyrimidin- 4(3 H)-one hydrochloride (Compound 13) 1. tert-Butyl {l-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]-l, 6- dihydropyrimidin-4-yl}methylcarbamate
Figure imgf000051_0001
To a cool solution (00C) of tert-butyl {l-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyOcyclohexy^-ljό-dihydropyrimidin^-ylJcarbamate (200 mg, 0.42 mmol) in THF (15 mL) add NaH (60%, 20 mg, 0.51 mmol). Stir 30 min at 00C. Add MeI (34 μL, 0.55 mmol). Slowly warm the mixture to RT and stir for 4 h at RT. Dilute with H2O, and extract with DCM. Dry over Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using preparative TLC plates (1000 micron 25% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. 2. 3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-6-(methylamino)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]-pyrimidin-
4(3H)-one hydrochloride (cmpd 13)
Figure imgf000051_0002
Stir the mixture of tert-bvΛy\ {l-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethy^cyclohexylj-l^-dihydropyrimidin^-yljmethylcarbamate (140 mg, 0.29 mmol) in 4M HCl-dioxane (10 mL) at 500C for 30 min. Concentrate and collect the solid from ether to give the title compound. MS (M+l) = 386.14; RT = 1 24 min.
N. 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(dimethylamino)-2-rcis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl1-pyrimidin- 4(3H)-one (Compound 14)
Figure imgf000051_0003
To a cool solution (00C) of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(methylamino)-2-[cis-4-
(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]-pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (63 mg, 0.16 mmol) in THF (5 mL) add NaH (60%, 8 mg, 0.20 mmol). Stir 30 min at 00C. Add MeI (13 μL, 0.21 mmol). Slowly warm the mixture to RT and stir for 16 h at RT. Dilute with H2O, and extract with DCM. Dry over Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using preparative TLC plates (1000 micron 10% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. MS (M+l) = 400.19;
Rx = 1.29 min.
O. 5-Chloro-3-('4-chlorophenvπ-6-(methylamino)-2-rcis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyll- pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (Compound 15)
Figure imgf000052_0001
To a solution of 3-(4-4hlorophenyl)-6-(methylamino)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)- cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one hydrochloride (50 mg, 0.13 mmol) in HOAc (4 mL) add NCS (21 mg, 0.16 mmol). Stir the reaction for 2 h at RT, dilute with H2O, extract with EtOAc, and wash with H2O. Dry over Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using preparative TLC plates (1000 micron 35% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. MS (M+l) = 420.11; Rx = 1 33 min.
P. 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-5-iodo-6-methyl-2-[c/5-4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexynpyrimidin- 4(3H)-one (Compound 16)
Figure imgf000052_0002
Add NIS (1.46 g, 6.5 mmol) to a solution of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-
(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (1.0 g, 2.7 mmol) in acetic acid. Allow the reaction to stir for 72 h. Add water and stir the mixture to form a brown precipitate. Purification by column chromatography on silica gel (hexanes: ethyl acetate 95:5) provides the title compound as a white solid. MS (M+l) = 497.11; Rτ = 1 38 min.
EXAMPLE 2
Synthesis of Additional Representative Substituted Pyrimidinones This Example illustrates the synthesis of additional representative substituted pyrimidinones.
A. 3-(4-chlorophenvπ-6-methyl-5-phenyl-2-[c/.y-4- (trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyl1pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (Compound 17)
Figure imgf000053_0001
Combine 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-5-iodo-6-methyl-2-[c«-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (O.lg, 0.22 mmol), phenyl boronic acid (0.035 g, 0.29 mmol), aqueous K3PO4 (2M, 0.22 mL) and dioxane (5 mL) and de-gas the solution for 10 min. Add Pd(PPh3)4 (8 mg, 0.007 mmol) and heat the mixture overnight (16 h) at 800C. After cooling to RT, evaporate the volatiles and partition the residue between H2O and CH2Cl2. Separate the layers, dry the organics (Na2SO4), filter and concentrate. Purify by preparative TLC (hexanes: ethyl acetate 90: 10) to provide the title compound as a white solid. 1HNMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.49 (d, 2H, J= 8.7 Hz), 7.41-7.31 (m, 5H), 7.17 (d, 2H, J = 8.4), 2.56 (m, IH), 2.26 (s, 3H), 2.19-2.13 (m, 3H), 2.04-1.97 (m, 2H), 1.58-1.51 (m, 4H). MS (M+l) = 447.14; Rτ = 1.4 min.
B. 3-(4-cMoro-2-nitrophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[c^-4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyllpyrimidin- 4(3H)-one (Compound 18)
Figure imgf000053_0002
Dissolve 3-(4-Cchlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-
(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (0.5g, 1.3 mmol) in cold H2SO4 (2 mL) and sonicate for 10 min to promote dissolution. Add 90% nitric acid (0.08 mL) dropwise at 0 0C and stir the reaction while warming to RT for 3 h. Add ice to the reaction, followed by cautious addition of diethyl ether while stirring to form a yellow precipitate. Collect the precipitate by filtration and wash with diethyl ether to provide the title compound as a light yellow solid. 1HNMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.79 (d, IH, J= 2.7 Hz), 7.73 (d, 2H, J= 8.4 Hz), 7.41-7.37 7.38 (dd, 2H, J = 8.4, 2.4 Hz), 6.26 (s, IH), 2.47 (m, IH), 2.31 (s, 3H), 2.14-2.09
(m, 3H), 1.98-1.88 (m, 2H), 1.59-1.53 (m, 4H). MS (M+l) = 416.19; Rτ = 1.3 min.
C. 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-5-(l .3-thiazol-2-yl)-2-rc/5-4- (trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (Compound 19)
Figure imgf000054_0001
Combine 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-5-iodo-6-methyl-2-[cw-4-
(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (70 mg, 0.16 mmol), 2- (tributylstannyl)thiazole (75 mg, 0.20 mmol) and toluene (5 mL) and degas the solution for 10 min. Add Pd(PPh3)4 (18 mg, 0.02 mmol). Heat the mixture overnight (16 h) at 110 0C. After cooling to RT, add aqueous KF and stir the reaction for 15 min. Separate the layers and extract the aqueous layer with EtOAc (2 X 10 mL). Combine the organics, wash with KF (aq) then H2O, dry (Na2SO4), filter and concentrate. Purification by preparative TLC (CH2Cl2: MeOH 95:5) provides the title compound as a white solid. MS (M+l) = 454.09; Rτ = 0.64 min.
D. 3-(4-Chlorophenyl)- 5-methyl 6-(methylamino)-2-rcis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyl]- pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (Compound 20)
1. tert-Butyl {5-bromo-l-(4-chlorophetιyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)-cyclohexyl]- 1, 6-dihydropyrimidin-4-yl} carbamate
Figure imgf000054_0002
To a solution of tert-butyl { 1 -(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)- cyclohexyl]-l,6-dihydropyrimidin-4-yl}carbamate (300 mg, 0.64 mmol) in acetic acid (10 mL) add N-bromosuccinimide (136 mg, 0.76 mmol). Stir the reaction for 16 h at RT, dilute with H2O, extract with EtOAc, and wash with H2O. Dry over Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using silica gel flash chromatography (25% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. 2. tert-Butyl 5-bromo-l-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-fcis-4-(tήfluoromethyl)-cyclohexylJ-
1, 6-dihydropyrimidin-4-yl(methyl) carbamate
Figure imgf000055_0001
To a cold solution (0 °C) of tert-butyl {5-bromo-l-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]-l,6-dihydropyrimidin-4-yl}carbamate (41 mg, 0.074 mmol) in THF (10 mL) add NaH (60%, 4 mg, 0.09 mmol). Stir 30 min at 00C. Add MeI (6 μL, 0.1 mmol). Slowly warm the mixture to RT and stir for 16 h at RT. Dilute with H2O, and extract with DCM. Dry over Na2SO4 and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using preparative silica gel TLC plates (1000 micron 20% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. 3. tert-Butyl {l-(4-chlorophenyl)-5-methyl-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)-cyclohexyl]-
1, 6-dihydropyrimidin-4-yl(methyl) carbamate
Figure imgf000055_0002
To a de-gassed mixture of tert-butyl 5-bromo-l-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)-cyclohexyl]-l,6-dihydropyrimidin-4-yl(methyl) carbamate (140 mg, 0.25 mmol), methyl boronic acid (152 mg, 2.54 mmol) and K3PO4 (2M in water, 318 μL, 0.64 mmol) in dioxane (10 mL) under nitrogen add Pd(PPh3)4 (29 mg, 0.025 mmol). Stir the mixture at 1100C in a sealed tube for 16 h, cool to RT, concentrate, and partition between water and EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum. Purify using preparative silica gel TLC plates (1000 micron/ 25% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
4. 3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-5-methyl 6-(methylamino)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)-cyclohexyl]- pyrimidin-4(3H)-one
Figure imgf000055_0003
Stir a mixture of tert-buXy\ { 1 -(4-chlorophenyl)-5-methyl-6-oxo-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]-l,6-dihydropyrimidin-4-yl(methyl) carbamate (60 mg, 0.12 mmol) in 4M HCl-dioxane (6 mL) at 50°C for 30 min. Concentrate and partition between water and EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, and concentrate under vacuum to give the title compound.
E. 2-(3-(trifluoromethyl)benzylamino)-3-(4-chlorophenyl')-5,6-dimethylpyrimidin-4(3H')-one (Compound 21)
1. 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-mercapto-5,6-dimethylpyrimidin-4(3H)-one
Figure imgf000056_0001
Ethyl 2-methyl-3-oxobutanoate (5 g) is adsorbed onto 8g of bentonite and then ammonium hydroxide solution (12 mL) is added. The resulting mixture is allowed to stand at RT for two days. The mixture is diluted with DCM and the entire mixture is filtered through celite and concentrated to give the crude, ethyl 3-amino-2-methylbut-2-enoate (2.63 g). This crude material is mixed with 4-chlorophenyl isothiocyante (3.Ig) and pyridine (45 mL) and heated for 16 h at 45°C. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure and the residue triturated with a 1 : 1 mixture of ethyl acetate and hexanes. The title compound is collected as a white solid via suction filtration.
2. 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-5,6-dimethyl-2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one
Figure imgf000056_0002
A solution of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-mercapto-5,6-dimethylpyrimidin-4(3H)-one (800 mg) and K2CO3 (828 mg) in acetonitrile (30 mL) is treated with 1.2 equivalents of methyl iodide (225 microliters). The mixture is heated at 700C for 16 h and then the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The residue is partitioned between EtOAc and water, and the combined organic layers are dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product is purified using silica gel column chromatography eluting with hexanes:ethyl acetate (4:1) to yield the title compound as a solid. 3. 2-(3-(trifluoromethyl)benzylamino)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-5,6-dimethylpyrimidin-4(3H)- one
Figure imgf000057_0001
A solution of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-5,6-dimethyl-2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (105 mg) in DCM (8 mL) is treated with meta-chloroperbenzoic acid (109 mg) and stirred at RT for 2 h. The mixture is washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution, dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure to provide crude sulfoxide which is used in the next step without further purification. The crude intermediate is dissolved in dimethyl sulfoxide and 2 equivalents of CsF are added followed by 1.2 equivalents of meta- trifluoromethyl-benzylamine. The mixture is heated at 80°C until thin layer chromatography indicates the starting material is consumed. The reaction mixture is partitioned between EtOAc and water and the organic layer is dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product is purified using preparative thin layer chromatography eluting with EtOAc/ hexanes (1:1). 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.53-7.41(m, 6H), 7.19(m, 2H), 4.58(d, 2H), 4.35(b, IH), 2.23(s, 3H), 1.98(s, 3H).
F. 3-r4-chlorophenyl)-5,6-dimethyl-2-(3,3,3-trifluoropropylthio)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (Compound 22)
Figure imgf000057_0002
A solution of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-mercapto-5,6-dimethylpyrimidin-4(3H)-one (102 mg) and potassium carbonate (106 mg) in acetonitrile is treated with 1.2 equivalents of 3- bromo-l,l,l-trifluoropropane and stirred at RT for 17 h. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure and the mixture partitioned between EtOAc and water. The EtOAc layer is dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue is purified via preparative thin layer chromatography eluting with hexanes/EtOAc (4:1) to give the title compound. 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 7.48(d, 2H), 7.17(d, 2H), 3.18(m, 2H), 2.50(m, 2H), 2.31(s, 3H), 2.04(s, 3H). G. 3-(benzordlthiazol-6-vπ-5-chloro-6-ethyl-2-('4-(trifluoromethvπcvclohexyl)pyrimidin-
4(3H)-one (Compound 23)
1. ethyl 3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)pent-2-enoate
Figure imgf000058_0001
This compound is prepared by reacting ethyl 3-aminopent-2-enoate with 4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexanecarbonyl chloride using procedures analogous to those described above.
2. 3-(benzo[d]thiazol-6-yl)-6-ethyl-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cydohexyl)pynmidin-4(3H)-one
Figure imgf000058_0002
This compound is prepared by reacting ethyl 3-(4-
(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)pent-2-enoate with 6-amino-benzothiazole using procedures analogous to those described above.
3. S-φenzofdJthiazol-ό-ylJ-S-chloro-ό-ethyl^-ft-ftrifluoromethylJcyclohexylJpyrimidin- 4(3H)-one
Figure imgf000058_0003
A solution of 3-(benzo[d]thiazol-6-yl)-6-ethyl-2-(4-
(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (250 mg) in acetic acid is treated with N- chlorosuccinimide (82 mg) and stirred for 1 h. The reaction mixture is heated at 1100C for 2 h and another quantity of N-chlorosuccinimide (40 mg) is added. After an additional 1.5 h, the solvent is removed under reduced pressure and the residue is partitioned between EtOAc and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution. The organic layer is dried (Na2SO4), concentrated under reduced pressure and then purified using preparative thin layer chromatography (hexanes/EtOAc [2:1]). Both the cis- and trans-isomers are isolated. 1H NMR of cis/trans- mixture (CDCl3): δ 9.13(s, IH), 8.28(d, IH), 7.82(s, IH), 7.34(d, IH), 2.85(q, 2H), 2.59(m,
IH), 2.16-1.49(m, 9H), 1.31(t, 3H).
H. 5-(5-chloro-4-(methylamino)-6-oxo-2-(cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyl)pyrimidin- l(6H)-yl)picolinonitrile (Compound 24)
1. l-(6-chloropyridin-3-yl)-6-oxo-2-(cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)-l,6- dihydropyrimidine-4-carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000059_0001
This carboxylic acid is prepared essentially as described above for the preparation of 1 -(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl] - 1 ,6-dihydropyrimidine-4- carboxylic acid.
2. tert-butyl l-(6-chloropyridin-3-yl)-6-oxo-2-(cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)-l, 6- dihydropyrimidin-4-yl(methyl)carbamate
Figure imgf000059_0002
This compound is prepared from the above carboxylic acid utilizing procedures analogous to those already given for tert-butyl {l-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]- 1 ,6-dihydropyrimidin-4-yl} methylcarbamate.
3. tert-butyl l-(6-cyanopyridin-3-yl)-6-oxo-2-(cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)-l, 6- dihydropyrimidin-4-yl(methyl)carbamate
Figure imgf000059_0003
A solution of tert-butyl l-(6-chloropyridin-3-yl)-6-oxo-2-((ls,4s)-4-
(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)- 1 ,6-dihydropyrimidin-4-yl(methyl)carbamate (250 mg, 0.513 mmol), Zn(CN)2 (36 mg, 0.308 mmol), and bis(diphenylphosphino)-ferrocene (16 mg, 0.03 mmol) in DMF/water (10 mL / 0.1 mL) is purged with dry nitrogen for 5 min and then tris(dibenzylideneacetone)-dipalladium (0) (14 mg, 0.015 mmol) is added. After purging for 5 additional min, the reaction mixture is heated in a sealed tube at 1150C for 1 h. The mixture is partitioned between EtOAc and brine and the organic layer is washed 3 times with water, dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product is purified using preparative thin layer chromatography (EtOAc/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
4. tert-butyl 5-chloro-l-(6-cyanopyridin-3-yl)-6-oxo-2-(cis-4-
(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)-l,6-dihydropyrimidin-4-yl(methyl)carbamate
Figure imgf000060_0001
A solution of /erf-butyl l-(6-cyanopyridin-3-yl)-6-oxo-2-(cis-4-
(trifluoromethyOcyclohexyO-ljό-dihydropyrimidin^-y^methy^carbamate (200 mg, 0.411 mmol) in acetic acid (10 mL) is treated with N-chlorosuccinimide (71 mg, 0.543 mmol) and stirred for 16 h at RT. The reaction mixture is diluted with cold water and the precipitate collected via suction filtration and dried. Preparative thin layer chromatography (ethyl acetate/ hexanes eluent) provides the title compound.
J. 5-(5-chloro-4-(methylamino)-6-oxo-2-(cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin- 1 (6H)-yl)picolinonitrile
Figure imgf000060_0002
To a flask containing tert-butyl 5-chloro-l-(6-cyanopyridin-3-yl)-6-oxo-2-(cw-4- (trifluoromethy^cyclohexyO-l^-dihydropyrimidin^-y^methyOcarbamate (138 mg) is added about 6 mL of HCl-dioxane solution (4M) and the mixture is heated at 500C for 30 min. The mixture is partitioned between DCM and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution, the organic layer is dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product is purified using preparative thin layer chromatography (ethyl acetate/ hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): δ 1.41-1.70 (3H, br m), 1.85-2.22 (5H, br m), 2.41 (IH, br m), 3.12 (3H, d, J=4.8 Hz), 5.36 (IH, br m), 7.76 (IH, dd, J=2.4 Hz), 7.88 (IH, d, J=8.4 Hz), 8.57 (IH, d, J=2.4 Hz).
I. cis-2-bicyclor3.1.01hexan-3-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methylpyrimidin-4(3H)-one) (Compound 25) 1. bicycloβ.1. OJhexane-3-carbonyl chloride
Figure imgf000061_0001
This compound is prepared by r of bicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylic acid (Gassman, P. G., Journal of the American Chemical Society, 1966, 88, 2252) with 1.2 equivalents of oxalyl chloride in DCM at RT followed by evaporation of the solvent.
2. methyl 3-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxamido)but-2-enoate
Figure imgf000061_0002
To a solution of methyl 3-aminocrotonate (1.38 g, 12.0 mmol) in pyridine (10 mL) and CHCl3 (30 mL) add bicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carbonyl chloride (10 mmol). Heat the mixture to reflux for 16 h, cool to RT, concentrate, and partition between EtOAc and water. Wash the organic layer with 6 M HCl, H2O and brine. Dry over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum. Purify using silica gel flash chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
3 . cis-2-bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methylpyrimidin-4(3H)-one)
Figure imgf000061_0003
To a solution of 4-chloroaniline (1.83 g, 14.3 mmol) in dichloroethane (30 mL) under nitrogen add trimethylaluminum (2 M in hexane, 7.2 mL, 14.3 mmol). Stir the mixture at RT for 30 min and add a solution of methyl 3-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxamido)but-2-enoate (9.55 mmol) in dichloroethane (10 mL). Stir the mixture at 900C for 16 h, cool to RT, quench with saturated Rochelle's salt, and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using flash chromatography (EtOAc/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
J. 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-c/.y-(3-(trifluoromethyl)cvclobutyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (Compound 26) 1. 3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclobutanecarbonyl chloride
Figure imgf000061_0004
This compound is prepared by reaction of 3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclobutanecarboxylic acid (Dolbier, W.R., Journal of the American Chemical Society, 1990, 112, 363) with 1.2 equivalents of oxalyl chloride in DCM at RT followed by careful evaporation of the solvent.
2. methyl 3-(3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclobutanecarboxamido)but-2-enoate
Figure imgf000062_0001
To a solution of methyl 3-aminocrotonate (1.38 g, 12.0 mmol) in pyridine (10 mL) and CHCl3 (30 mL) add 3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclobutanecarbonyl chloride (10 mmol). Heat the mixture to reflux for 16 h, cool to RT, concentrate, and partition between EtOAc and water. Wash the organic layer with 6 M HCl, H2O and brine. Dry over Na2SO4, and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using silica gel flash chromatography (EtOAc/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
3 . 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-cis-(3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclobutyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one
Figure imgf000062_0002
To a solution of 4-chloroaniline (1.83 g, 14.3 mmol) in dichloroethane (30 mL) under nitrogen add trimethylaluminum (2 M in hexane, 7.2 mL, 14.3 mmol). Stir the mixture at RT for 30 min and add a solution of methyl 3-(3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclobutanecarboxamido)but-2- enoate (9.55 mmol) in dichloroethane (10 mL). Stir the mixture at 900C for 16h, cool to RT, quench with saturated Rochelle's salt, and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using silica gel flash chromatography (EtOAc/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
K. 2-(bicvclor2.2.11heptan-2-yl)-3-(4-fluorophenyl)-6-memylpyrimidin-4(3H)-one (Compound 27)
Figure imgf000062_0003
This compound is prepared using conditions analogous to those already described starting with bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxylic acid [common name norbornane-2- carboxylic acid].
L. 3-(4-fluorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-(3-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (trans isomer; Compound 28)
1. 3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexanecarboxylic acid
Figure imgf000063_0001
Dissolve 3-(trifluoromethyl)-benzoic acid (2 g) in acetic acid (100 mL) and add platinum oxide (400 mg). Hydrogenate the mixture under 50 psi of hydrogen at 600C for 16 h. Filter the mixture through celite and concentrate under reduced pressure. Add toluene to the residue and concentrate again, repeating this procedure three additional times, to afford the title acid.
2. 3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexanecarbonyl chloride
Figure imgf000063_0002
This compound is prepared by reaction of 3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexanecarboxylic acid with 1.2 equivalents of oxalyl chloride in DCM at RT followed by careful evaporation of the solvent.
3. methyl 3-(3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)but-2-enoate
Figure imgf000063_0003
To a solution of methyl 3-aminocrotonate (1.38 g, 12.0 mmol) in pyridine (10 mL) and
CHCl3 (30 mL) add 3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexanecarbonyl chloride (10 mmol). Heat the mixture to reflux for 16 h, cool to RT, concentrate, and partition between EtOAc and water. Wash the organic layer with 6 M HCl, H2O and brine. Dry over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum. Purify using silica gel flash chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. 4. 3-(4-βuorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-(3-(tήβuoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one
(trans isomer)
Figure imgf000064_0001
To a solution of 4-fluoroaniline (14 mmol) in dichloroethane (30 mL) under nitrogen add trimethylaluminum (2 M in hexane, 7.2 mL, 14.3 mmol). Stir the mixture at RT for 30 min and add a solution of methyl 3-(3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)but-2- enoate (9.55 mmol) in dichloroethane (10 mL). Stir the mixture at 900C for 16 h, cool to RT, quench with saturated Rochelle's salt, and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, and concentrate under vacuum. Separate the trans-isomeτ from the c/j-isomer using HPLC.
M. 5-bromo-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-(3-(trifluoromethyl)cvclobutyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)- one (cis isomer; Compound 29)
Figure imgf000064_0002
To a solution of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-(3-
(trifluoromethyl)cyclobutyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one) (cis isomer) (6.71 mmol) in HOAc (30 mL) add Br2 (2.2 g, 13.48 mmol). Stir the mixture at RT for 16 h, dilute with H2O, and collect the solid. Purify using flash chromatography (10% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
N. 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-5,6-dimethyl-2-(3-(trifluoromethyl)cvclobutyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer; Compound 30)
Figure imgf000064_0003
To a de-gassed mixture of 5-bromo-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-(3-
(trifluoromethyl)cyclobutyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer) (0.22 mmol) and trimethylaluminum (2 M in hexane, 0.33 mL, 0.66 mmol) in THF (6 mL) under nitrogen add
Pd(PPh3)4 (27 mg, 0.022 mmol). Stir the mixture at 800C for 16 h, cool to RT, quench with saturated Rochelle's salt, and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum. Purify using preparative TLC plates (1000 micron/ 15% ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
O. 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-(6.6-difluorobicvclor3.1.01hexan-3-yl)-6-methylpyrimidin-4(3H)- one (Compound 31)
1. methyl 6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate
This compound is prepared followi Xng a procedur~e similar to that used by Nelson, J. Med. Chem. 1990, 33, 833-838. A solution of methyl 3-cyclopentenecarboxylate in diglyme is heated to 1600C in an oil bath and stirred vigorously. Eight molar equivalents of sodium chlorofluoroacetate are added and the mixture heated for 1 h. An additional quantity (8 equivalents) of the reagent is added and heated for 30 min before cooling. The reaction mixture is partitioned between water and ethyl acetate and the organic layer is dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. Flash chromatography on silica gel yields the geminal-difluoro compound.
2. 6, 6-difluorobicyclo[3.1. OJ hexane-3-carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000065_0001
A solution of methyl 6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxylate in THF/water (1 : 1) is treated with 5 equivalents of LiOH mono-hydrate at RT. A small amount of MeOH is added to improve the reaction homogeneity. After stirring for 16 h, the mixture is concentrated under reduced pressure and then dissolved in a small amount of water. Concentrated hydrochloric acid (5 equivalents) is added and the pH adjusted to ~6 using dilute hydrochloric acid. The aqueous is extracted with ethyl acetate and the combined organics are dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the title acid. 3. 6,6-difluorobicyclo[ 3.1. OJ hexane-3-carbonyl chloride
Figure imgf000065_0002
This compound is prepared by reaction of 6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3- carboxylic acid with 1.2 equivalents of oxalyl chloride in DCM at RT followed by careful evaporation of the solvent. 4. methyl 3 -(6, 6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carboxamido)but-2-enoate
Figure imgf000066_0001
To a solution of methyl 3-aminocrotonate (1.38 g, 12.0 mmol) in pyridine (10 mL) and CHCl3 (30 mL) add ό.ό-difluorobicycloβ.l.OJhexane-S-carbonyl chloride (10 mmol). Heat the mixture to reflux for 16 h, cool to RT, concentrate, and partition between EtOAc and water. Wash the organic layer with 6 M HCl, H2O and brine. Dry over Na2SO4, concentrate under vacuum. Purify using silica gel flash chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
5. 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-(6, 6-dtfluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-6-methylpyrimidin- 4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
Figure imgf000066_0002
To a solution of 4-chloroaniline (1.83 g, 14.3 mmol) in dichloroethane (30 mL) under nitrogen add trimethylaluminum (2 M in hexane, 7.2 mL, 14.3 mmol). Stir the mixture at RT for 30 min and add a solution of methyl 3-(6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3- carboxamido)but-2-enoate (9.55 mmol) in dichloroethane (10 mL). Stir the mixture at 900C for 16 h, cool to RT, quench with saturated Rochelle's salt, and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using flash chromatography (EtOAc/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
P. 3-(2-cMoropyrimidin-5-yl)-6-methyl-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)- one (cis isomer: Compound 32)
Figure imgf000066_0003
To a solution of 2-amino-5-chloropyrimidine (14.3 mmol) in DCE (30 mL) under nitrogen add trimethylaluminum (2 M in hexane, 7.2 mL, 14.3 mmol). Stir the mixture at RT for 30 min and add a solution of methyl 3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)-cyclohexanecarboxamido)but-
2-enoate (2.8 g, 9.55 mmol) in DCE (10 mL). Stir the mixture at 900C for overnight, cool to RT, quench with saturated Rochelle's salt, and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using flash chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
Q. 5-(4-methyl-6-oxo-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyl)pyrimidin- 1 (6H)-yl)pyrimidine-2- carbonitrile (cis isomer; Compound 33)
Figure imgf000067_0001
A solution of 3-(2-chloropyrimidin-5-yl)-6-methyl-2-(4-
(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (0.513 mmol), Zn(CN)2 (36 mg, 0.308 mmol), and bis(diphenylphosphino)-ferrocene (16 mg, 0.03 mmol) in DMF/water (10 mL / 0.1 mL) is purged with dry nitrogen for 5 min and then tris(dibenzylideneacetone)- dipalladium (0) (14 mg, 0.015 mmol) is added. After purging for 5 additional min, the reaction mixture is heated in a sealed tube at 115°C for 1 h. The mixture is partitioned between EtOAc and brine and the organic layer is washed 3 times with water, dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product is purified using preparative thin layer chromatography (EtOAc/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
R. 3-(5-chlorothiazol-2-yl)-6-methyl-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer; Compound 34)
Figure imgf000067_0002
To a solution of 2-amino-5-chlorothiazole (14.3 mmol) in DCE (30 mL) under nitrogen add trimethylaluminum (2 M in hexane, 7.2 mL, 14.3 mmol). Stir the mixture at RT for 30 min and add a solution of methyl 3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)-cyclohexanecarboxamido)but- 2-enoate (2.8 g, 9.55 mmol) in DCE (10 mL). Stir the mixture at 900C for overnight, cool to RT, quench with saturated Rochelle's salt, and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using flash chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound. S. 6-methyl-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cvclohexyl)-3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-2-yl)pyrimidin- 4(3H)-one (cis isomer; Compound 35)
Figure imgf000068_0001
To a solution of 2-amino-4-(trifluoromethyl)-oxazole (14.3 mmol) in DCE (30 mL) under nitrogen add trimethylaluminum (2 M in hexane, 7.2 mL, 14.3 mmol). Stir the mixture at RT for 30 min and add a solution of methyl 3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)- cyclohexanecarboxamido)but-2-enoate (2.8 g, 9.55 mmol) in DCE (10 mL). Stir the mixture at 900C for overnight, cool to RT, quench with saturated Rochelle's salt, and extract with EtOAc. Dry over Na2SO4, and concentrate under vacuum. Purify using flash chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes eluent) to give the title compound.
EXAMPLE 3 Additional Representative Substituted Pyrimidinones
Using routine modifications, the starting materials may be varied and additional steps employed to produce other compounds provided herein. Compounds listed in Table I and
Table II are prepared using such methods. In Table I, a "*" in the column headed "IC50" indicates that the IC50 determined as described in Example 6 is 1 micromolar or less (i.e., the concentration of such compounds that is required to provide a 50% decrease in the fluorescence response of cells exposed to one IC50 of capsaicin is 1 micromolar or less). The determined molecular weight (presented as M+l) is shown in the column headed "MS" in
Table I, with retention time (RT) given in minutes.
Table I
Representative Substituted Pyrimidinone Derivatives Compound Name MS R1 IC50
3-(4-fluorophenyl)-6-
36 methyl-2-[cis-4- - - -.
36 (trifluoromethyl)cyclohe 355 23 L28 xyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one
Figure imgf000068_0002
Compound Name MS RT IC5Q
Figure imgf000069_0001
he 362.25 1.26
Figure imgf000069_0002
3-(3,4-difluorophenyl)- 6-methyl-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohe 373.23 1.3 xyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one
3 -(6-chloropyridin-3 -yl)- 6-methyl-2-[cis-4- 372 21 1 26
(trifluoromethyl)cyclohe xyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one
Figure imgf000069_0003
IC50
Figure imgf000070_0001
6-methyl-3-(4- methylphenyl)-2-[cis-4- 351 26 χ 32 (trifluoromethyl)cyclohe xyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one
Figure imgf000070_0002
440.15 1.31
376.24 1.29
396.20 1.29
Figure imgf000070_0003
24 } 35
Figure imgf000070_0004
3 -(4-chlorophenyl)-6- ethyl-2-[cis-4- 3g5 23 γ 35
(trifluoromethyl)cyclohe xyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one
Figure imgf000070_0005
Compound Name MS R1 5J
Figure imgf000071_0001
Figure imgf000072_0001
60 377.18 1.25
61 369.13 1.33
Figure imgf000072_0002
Figure imgf000073_0001
Compound Name MS R1 IC20
Figure imgf000074_0001
430.12 1.38
Figure imgf000074_0002
Table II Additional Representative Substituted Pyrimidinone Derivatives
Compound Name
3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-(6,6- difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-5,6- dimethylpyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
Figure imgf000074_0003
ompound Name
5 -chloro-3 -(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-(3 - (trifluoromethyl)cyclobutyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
5-chloro-3-(5-chloropyridin-2-yl)-2-(6,6- difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-6-methylpyrimidin- 4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
5-chloro-3-(5-chloropyridin-2-yl)-2-(6,6- difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-6- (methylamino)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
4-(5-chloro-2-(6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)- 4-(methylamino)-6-oxopyrimidin- 1 (6H)- yl)benzonitrile (cis isomer)
4-(2-(6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-4,5- dimethyl-6-oxopyrimidin-l (6H)-yl)benzonitrile (cis isomer)
3-(6-chloropyridin-3-yl)-2-(6,6- difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-6-methylpyrimidin-
4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
4-(2-(6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-4- (methylamino)-6-oxopyrimidin- 1 (6H)-yl)benzonitrile (cis isomer)
Figure imgf000075_0001
80 -one
Figure imgf000076_0001
5-(2-(6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-4-methyl- 6-oxopyrimidin-l(6H)-yl)picolinonitrile (cis isomer)
5-bromo-3-(5-chloropyridin-2-yl)-2-(6,6- difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-6- (methylamino)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
2-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-5-chloro-3-(4- fluorophenyl)-6-(methylamino)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
5-(4,5-dimethyl-6-oxo-2-(3- (trifluoromethyl)cyclobutyl)pyrimidin- 1 (6H)- yl)picolinonitrile (cis isomer)
6-(2-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-5-chloro-4-methyl-6- oxopyrimidin-l(6H)-yl)nicotinonitrile (cis isomer)
2-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-3-(4-fluorophenyl)-5- methyl-6-(methylamino)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
2-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6- (methylamino)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
Figure imgf000076_0002
Compound Name
2-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-3-(5-chloropyridin-2-yl)- 6-methylpyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
4-(2-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-4-methyl-6- oxopyrimidin-l(6H)-yl)benzonitrile (cis isomer)
2-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-3-(4-fluorophenyl)-6- methylpyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
2-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-3-(6-chloropyridin-3-yl)- 6-(methylamino)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
6-(2-bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-5-bromo-4- (methylamino)-6-oxopyrimidin- 1 (6H)- yl)nicotinonitrile (cis isomer)
5-chloro-6-(methylamino)-3-(thiophen-2-yl)-2-(4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
6-(methylamino)-3-(thiophen-3-yl)-2-(4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
6-methyl-3-(5-(trifluoromethyl)-l,3,4-oxadiazol-2- yl)-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin- 4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
3-(5-chloropyrazin-2-yl)-6-methyl-2-(4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
Figure imgf000077_0001
Compound Name
6-methyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-
97 (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
3-(benzo[d]thiazol-5-yl)-5-chloro-6-methyl-2-(4-
98 (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
3-(benzo[d]oxazol-5-yl)-5-chloro-6-methyl-2-(4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one (cis isomer)
100 5-(2-(bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptan-2-yl)-4-methyl-6- oxopyrimidin- 1 (6H)-yl)picolinonitrile
5-(4-methyl-6-oxo-2-(3- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin- 1 (6H)- yl)picolinonitrile (trans isomer)
Figure imgf000078_0001
6-methyl-3-(5-methylthiazol-2-yl)-2-(( 1 s,4s)-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one
Figure imgf000078_0002
-yl)- n-
Figure imgf000078_0003
5-chloro-2-((lS,3r,5R)-6,6- difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-6-methyl-3-(2- methylthiazol-5-yl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one
Figure imgf000078_0004
EXAMPLE 4
VRl-Transfected Cells and Membrane Preparations
This Example illustrates the preparation of VRl-transfected cells and VRl -containing membrane preparations for use in capsaicin binding assays (Example 5). A cDNA encoding full length human capsaicin receptor (SEQ ID NO: 1 , 2 or 3 of U.S.
Patent No. 6,482,611) is subcloned in the plasmid pBK-CMV (Stratagene, La Jolla, CA) for recombinant expression in mammalian cells.
Human embryonic kidney (HEK293) cells are transfected with the pBK-CMV expression construct encoding the full length human capsaicin receptor using standard methods. The transfected cells are selected for two weeks in media containing G418 (400 μg/ml) to obtain a pool of stably transfected cells. Independent clones are isolated from this pool by limiting dilution to obtain clonal stable cell lines for use in subsequent experiments.
For radioligand binding experiments, cells are seeded in T 175 cell culture flasks in media without antibiotics and grown to approximately 90% confluency. The flasks are then washed with PBS and harvested in PBS containing 5 mM EDTA. The cells are pelleted by gentle centrifugation and stored at -800C until assayed.
Previously frozen cells are disrupted with the aid of a tissue homogenizer in ice-cold
HEPES homogenization buffer (5mM KCl 5, 5.8mM NaCl, 0.75mM CaCl2, 2mM MgCl2, 320 mM sucrose, and 10 mM HEPES pH 7.4). Tissue homogenates are first centrifuged for 10 min at 1000 x g (4 0C) to remove the nuclear fraction and debris, and then the supernatant from the first centrifugation is further centrifuged for 30 min at 35,000 x g (4 0C) to obtain a partially purified membrane fraction. Membranes are resuspended in the HEPES homogenization buffer prior to the assay. An aliquot of this membrane homogenate is used to determine protein concentration via the Bradford method (BIO-RAD Protein Assay Kit, #500- 0001 , BIO-RAD, Hercules, CA).
EXAMPLE 5 Capsaicin Receptor Binding Assay
This Example illustrates a representative assay of capsaicin receptor binding that may be used to determine the binding affinity of compounds for the capsaicin (VRl) receptor. Binding studies with [3H] Resiniferatoxin (RTX) are carried out essentially as described by Szallasi and Blumberg (1992) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ter. 262:883-888. In this protocol, non-specific RTX binding is reduced by adding bovine alphai acid glycoprotein (100 μg per tube) after the binding reaction has been terminated. [ H] RTX (37 Ci/mmol) is synthesized by and obtained from the Chemical Synthesis and Analysis Laboratory, National Cancer Institute-Frederick Cancer Research and Development Center, Frederick, MD. [3H] RTX may also be obtained from commercial vendors (e.g., Amersham Pharmacia Biotech, Inc.; Piscataway, NJ). The membrane homogenate of Example 4 is centrifuged as before and resuspended to a protein concentration of 333μg/ml in homogenization buffer. Binding assay mixtures are set up on ice and contain [3H]RTX (specific activity 2200 mCi/ml), 2 μl non-radioactive test compound, 0.25 mg/ml bovine serum albumin (Cohn fraction V), and 5 x 104 - 1 * 105 VRl- transfected cells. The final volume is adjusted to 500 μl (for competition binding assays) or 1,000 μl (for saturation binding assays) with the ice-cold HEPES homogenization buffer solution (pH 7.4) described above. Non-specific binding is defined as that occurring in the presence of 1 μM non-radioactive RTX (Alexis Corp.; San Diego, CA). For saturation binding, [3H]RTX is added in the concentration range of 7-1,000 pM, using 1 to 2 dilutions. Typically 11 concentration points are collected per saturation binding curve. Competition binding assays are performed in the presence of 60 pM [3H]RTX and various concentrations of test compound. The binding reactions are initiated by transferring the assay mixtures into a 37°C water bath and are terminated following a 60 minute incubation period by cooling the tubes on ice. Membrane-bound RTX is separated from free, as well as any alphai-acid glycoprotein-bound RTX, by filtration onto WALLAC glass fiber filters (PERKIN-ELMER, Gaithersburg, MD) which are pre-soaked with 1.0% PEI (polyethyleneimine) for 2 hours prior to use. Filters are allowed to dry overnight then counted in a WALLAC 1205 BETA PLATE counter after addition of WALLAC BETA SCINT scintillation fluid.
Equilibrium binding parameters are determined by fitting the allosteric Hill equation to the measured values with the aid of the computer program FIT P (Biosoft, Ferguson, MO) as described by Szallasi, et al. (1993) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 266:678-683. Compounds provided herein generally exhibit K, values for capsaicin receptor of less than 1 μM, 100 nM, 50 nM, 25 nM, 10 nM, or 1 nM in this assay.
EXAMPLE 6 Calcium Mobilization Assay
This Example illustrates representative calcium mobilization assays for use in evaluating test compounds for agonist and antagonist activity.
Cells transfected with expression plasmids (as described in Example 4) and thereby expressing human capsaicin receptor are seeded and grown to 70-90% confluency in FALCON black-walled, clear-bottomed 96-well plates (#3904, BECTON-DICKINSON,
Franklin Lakes, NJ). The culture medium is emptied from the 96 well plates and FLUO-3
AM calcium sensitive dye (Molecular Probes, Eugene, OR) is added to each well (dye solution: 1 mg FLUO-3 AM, 440 μL DMSO and 440 μl 20% pluronic acid in DMSO, diluted 1 :250 in Krebs-Ringer HEPES (KRH) buffer (25 mM HEPES, 5 mM KCl, 0.96 mM
NaH2PO4, 1 mM MgSO4, 2 mM CaCl2, 5 mM glucose, 1 mM probenecid, pH 7.4), 50 μl diluted solution per well). Plates are covered with aluminum foil and incubated at 37 0C for
1-2 hours in an environment containing 5% CO2. After the incubation, the dye is emptied from the plates, and the cells are washed once with KRH buffer, and resuspended in KRH buffer.
DETERMINATION OF CAPSAICIN EC50
To measure the ability of a test compound to agonize or antagonize a calcium mobilization response in cells expressing capsaicin receptors to capsaicin or other vanilloid agonist, the EC50 of the agonist capsaicin is first determined. An additional 20 μl of KRH buffer and 1 μl DMSO is added to each well of cells, prepared as described above. 100 μl capsaicin in KRH buffer is automatically transferred by the FLIPR instrument to each well.
Capsaicin-induced calcium mobilization is monitored using either FLUOROSKAN ASCENT
(Labsystems; Franklin, MA) or FLIPR (fluorometric imaging plate reader system; Molecular
Devices, Sunnyvale, CA) instruments. Data obtained between 30 and 60 seconds after agonist application are used to generate an 8-point concentration response curve, with final capsaicin concentrations of 1 nM to 3 μM. KALEIDAGRAPH software (Synergy Software,
Reading, PA) is used to fit the data to the equation: y=a*(l/(l+(b/x)c)) to determine the 50% excitatory concentration (EC50) for the response. In this equation, y is the maximum fluorescence signal, x is the concentration of the agonist or antagonist (in this case, capsaicin), a is the Em3x, b corresponds to the EC50 value and c is the Hill coefficient.
DETERMINATION OF AGONIST ACTIVITY
Test compounds are dissolved in DMSO, diluted in KRH buffer, and immediately added to cells prepared as described above. 100 nM capsaicin (an approximate EC90 concentration) is also added to cells in the same 96-well plate as a positive control. The final concentration of test compounds in the assay wells is between 0.1 nM and 5 μM.
The ability of a test compound to act as an agonist of the capsaicin receptor is determined by measuring the fluorescence response of cells expressing capsaicin receptors elicited by the compound as function of compound concentration. This data is fit as described above to obtain the EC50, which is generally less than 1 micromolar, preferably less than 100 nM, and more preferably less than 10 nM. The extent of efficacy of each test compound is also determined by calculating the response elicited by a concentration of test compound (typically 1 μM) relative to the response elicited by 100 nM capsaicin. This value, called Percent of Signal (POS), is calculated by the following equation:
POS=100*test compound response /100 nM capsaicin response This analysis provides quantitative assessment of both the potency and efficacy of test compounds as human capsaicin receptor agonists. Agonists of the human capsaicin receptor generally elicit detectable responses at concentrations less than 100 μM, or preferably at concentrations less than 1 μM, or most preferably at concentrations less than 10 nM. Extent of efficacy at human capsaicin receptor is preferably greater than 30 POS, more preferably greater than 80 POS at a concentration of 1 μM. Certain agonists are essentially free of antagonist activity as demonstrated by the absence of detectable antagonist activity in the assay described below at compound concentrations below 4 nM, more preferably at concentrations below 10 μM and most preferably at concentrations less than or equal to 100 μM.
DETERMINATION OF ANTAGONIST ACTIVITY
Test compounds are dissolved in DMSO, diluted in 20 μl KRH buffer so that the final concentration of test compounds in the assay well is between 1 μM and 5 μM, and added to cells prepared as described above. The 96 well plates containing prepared cells and test compounds are incubated in the dark, at RT for 0.5 to 6 hours. It is important that the incubation not continue beyond 6 hours. Just prior to determining the fluorescence response, 100 μl capsaicin in KRH buffer at twice the EC50 concentration is automatically added by the FLIPR instrument to each well of the 96 well plate for a final sample volume of 200 μl and a final capsaicin concentration equal to the EC50. The final concentration of test compounds in the assay wells is between 1 μM and 5 μM. Antagonists of the capsaicin receptor decrease this response by at least about 20%, preferably by at least about 50%, and most preferably by at least 80%, as compared to matched control (i.e., cells treated with capsaicin at twice the EC50 concentration in the absence of test compound), at a concentration of 10 micromolar or less, preferably 1 micromolar or less. The concentration of antagonist required to provide a 50% decrease, relative to the response observed in the presence of capsaicin and without antagonist, is the IC50 for the antagonist, and is preferably below 1 micromolar, 100 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar. The data is analyzed as follows. First, the average maximum relative fluorescent unit
(RFU) response from the negative control wells (no agonist) is subtracted from the maximum response detected for each of the other experimental wells. Second, average maximum RFU response is calculated for the positive control wells (agonist wells). Then, percent inhibition for each compound tested is calculated using the equation:
Percent Inhibition = 100 - 100 x (Peak Signal in Test Cells / Peak Signal in Control Cells)
The % inhibition data is plotted as a function of test compound concentration and test compound IC50 is determined using, for example, KALEIDAGRAPH software (Synergy Software, Reading, PA) best fit of the data to the equation: y = m,*(l/(l+(m2/mo)m3)) where y is the percent inhibition, mo is the concentration of the agonist, mi is the maximum RFU, m2 corresponds to the test compound IC50 (the concentration required to provide a 50% decrease, relative to the response observed in the presence of agonist and without antagonist) and m3 is the Hill coefficient. Alternatively, test compound IC50 is determined using a linear regression in which x is ln(concentration of test compound) and y is ln(percent inhibition^ 100 - percent inhibition). Data with a percent inhibition that is greater than 90% or less than 15% are rejected and are not used in the regression. The IC50 calculated in this fashion is e intercept/slope) Certain preferred VRl modulators are antagonists that are essentially free of agonist activity as demonstrated by the absence of detectable agonist activity in the assay described above at compound concentrations below 4 nM, more preferably at concentrations below 10 μM and most preferably at concentrations less than or equal to 100 μM.
EXAMPLE 7 Dorsal Root Ganglion Cell Assay
This Example illustrates a representative dorsal root ganglian cell assay for evaluating VRl antagonist or agonist activity of a compound.
DRG are dissected from neonatal rats, dissociated and cultured using standard methods (Aguayo and White (1992) Brain Research 570:61-67). After 48 hour incubation, cells are washed once and incubated for 30-60 minutes with the calcium sensitive dye Fluo 4 AM (2.5-10 ug/ml; TefLabs, Austin, TX). Cells are then washed once. Addition of capsaicin to the cells results in a VRl -dependent increase in intracellular calcium levels which is monitored by a change in Fluo-4 fluorescence with a fluorometer. Data are collected for 60- 180 seconds to determine the maximum fluorescent signal. For antagonist assays, various concentrations of compound are added to the cells.
Fluorescent signal is then plotted as a function of compound concentration to identify the concentration required to achieve a 50% inhibition of the capsaicin-activated response, or IC50. Antagonists of the capsaicin receptor preferably have an IC50 below 1 micromolar, 100 nanomolar, 10 nanomolar or 1 nanomolar.
For agonist assays, various concentrations of compound are added to the cells without the addition of capsaicin. Compounds that are capsaicin receptor agonists result in a VRl- dependent increase in intracellular calcium levels which is monitored by a change in Fluo-4 fluorescence with a fluorometer. The EC50, or concentration required to achieve 50% of the maximum signal for a capsaicin-activated response, is preferably below 1 micromolar, below 100 nanomolar or below 10 nanomolar.
EXAMPLE 8 Animal Models for Determining Pain Relief
This Example illustrates representative methods for assessing the degree of pain relief provided by a compound.
A. Pain Relief Testing
The following methods may be used to assess pain relief.
MECHANICAL ALLODYNIA
Mechanical allodynia (an abnormal response to an innocuous stimulus) is assessed essentially as described by Chaplan et al. (1994) J. Neurosci. Methods 53:55-63 and TaI and Eliav (1998) Pain 64(3):511-518. A series of von Frey filaments of varying rigidity (typically 8-14 filaments in a series) are applied to the plantar surface of the hind paw with just enough force to bend the filament. The filaments are held in this position for no more than three seconds or until a positive allodynic response is displayed by the rat. A positive allodynic response consists of lifting the affected paw followed immediately by licking or shaking of the paw. The order and frequency with which the individual filaments are applied are determined by using Dixon up-down method. Testing is initiated with the middle hair of the series with subsequent filaments being applied in consecutive fashion, ascending or descending, depending on whether a negative or positive response, respectively, is obtained with the initial filament.
Compounds are effective in reversing or preventing mechanical allodynia-like symptoms if rats treated with such compounds require stimulation with a Von Frey filament of higher rigidity strength to provoke a positive allodynic response as compared to control untreated or vehicle treated rats. Alternatively, or in addition, testing of an animal in chronic pain may be done before and after compound administration. In such an assay, an effective compound results in an increase in the rigidity of the filament needed to induce a response after treatment, as compared to the filament that induces a response before treatment or in an animal that is also in chrome pain but is left untreated or is treated with vehicle. Test compounds are administered before or after onset of pain. When a test compound is administered after pain onset, testing is performed 10 minutes to three hours after administration.
MECHANICAL HYPERALGESIA
Mechanical hyperalgesia (an exaggerated response to painful stimulus) is tested essentially as described by Koch et al. (1996) Analgesia 2(3):157-164. Rats are placed in individual compartments of a cage with a warmed, perforated metal floor. Hind paw withdrawal duration (i.e., the amount of time for which the animal holds its paw up before placing it back on the floor) is measured after a mild pinprick to the plantar surface of either hind paw. Compounds produce a reduction in mechanical hyperalgesia if there is a statistically significant decrease in the duration of hindpaw withdrawal. Test compound may be administered before or after onset of pain. For compounds administered after pain onset, testing is performed 10 minutes to three hours after administration.
THERMAL HYPERALGESIA Thermal hyperalgesia (an exaggerated response to noxious thermal stimulus) is measured essentially as described by Hargreaves et al. (1988) Pain. 32(l):77-88. Briefly, a constant radiant heat source is applied the animals' plantar surface of either hind paw. The time to withdrawal (i.e., the amount of time that heat is applied before the animal moves its paw), otherwise described as thermal threshold or latency, determines the animal's hind paw sensitivity to heat.
Compounds produce a reduction in thermal hyperalgesia if there is a statistically significant increase in the time to hindpaw withdrawal (i.e., the thermal threshold to response or latency is increased). Test compound may be administered before or after onset of pain. For compounds administered after pain onset, testing is performed 10 minutes to three hours after administration.
B. Pain Models
Pain may be induced using any of the following methods, to allow testing of analgesic efficacy of a compound. In general, compounds provided herein result in a statistically significant reduction in pain as determined by at least one of the previously described testing methods, using male SD rats and at least one of the following models.
ACUTE INFLAMMATORY PAIN MODEL
Acute inflammatory pain is induced using the carrageenan model essentially as described by Field et al. (1997) Br. J. Pharmacol. 121(8): 1513-1522. 100-200 μl of 1-2% carrageenan solution is injected into the rats' hind paw. Three to four hours following injection, the animals' sensitivity to thermal and mechanical stimuli is tested using the methods described above. A test compound (0.01 to 50 mg/kg) is administered to the animal, prior to testing, or prior to injection of carrageenan. The compound can be administered orally or through any parenteral route, or topically on the paw. Compounds that relieve pain in this model result in a statistically significant reduction in mechanical allodynia and/or thermal hyperalgesia.
CHRONIC INFLAMMATORY PAIN MODEL
Chronic inflammatory pain is induced using one of the following protocols: 1. Essentially as described by Bertorelli et al. (1999) Br. J. Pharmacol. 128(6): 1252-
1258, and Stein et al. (1998) Pharmacol. Biochem. Behav. 31(2):455-51, 200 μl Complete Freund's Adjuvant (0.1 mg heat killed and dried M. Tuberculosis) is injected to the rats' hind paw: 100 μl into the dorsal surface and 100 μl into the plantar surface. 2. Essentially as described by Abbadie et al. (1994) J Neurosci. 14(10):5865-5871 rats are injected with 150 μl of CFA (1.5 mg) in the tibio-tarsal joint.
Prior to injection with CFA in either protocol, an individual baseline sensitivity to mechanical and thermal stimulation of the animals' hind paws is obtained for each experimental animal.
Following injection of CFA, rats are tested for thermal hyperalgesia, mechanical allodynia and mechanical hyperalgesia as described above. To verify the development of symptoms, rats are tested on days 5, 6, and 7 following CFA injection. On day 7, animals are treated with a test compound, morphine or vehicle. An oral dose of morphine of 1 -5 mg/kg is suitable as positive control. Typically, a dose of 0.01-50 mg/kg of test compound is used.
Compounds can be administered as a single bolus prior to testing or once or twice or three times daily, for several days prior to testing. Drugs are administered orally or through any parenteral route, or applied topically to the animal.
Results are expressed as Percent Maximum Potential Efficacy (MPE). 0% MPE is defined as analgesic effect of vehicle, 100% MPE is defined as an animal's return to pre-CFA baseline sensitivity. Compounds that relieve pain in this model result in a MPE of at least
30%.
CHRONIC NEUROPATHIC PAIN MODEL
Chronic neuropathic pain is induced using the chronic constriction injury (CCI) to the rat's sciatic nerve essentially as described by Bennett and Xie (1988) Pain 33:87-107. Rats are anesthetized (e.g. with an intraperitoneal dose of 50-65 mg/kg pentobarbital with additional doses administered as needed). The lateral aspect of each hind limb is shaved and disinfected. Using aseptic technique, an incision is made on the lateral aspect of the hind limb at the mid thigh level. The biceps femoris is bluntly dissected and the sciatic nerve is exposed. On one hind limb of each animal, four loosely tied ligatures are made around the sciatic nerve approximately 1-2 mm apart. On the other side the sciatic nerve is not ligated and is not manipulated. The muscle is closed with continuous pattern and the skin is closed with wound clips or sutures. Rats are assessed for mechanical allodynia, mechanical hyperalgesia and thermal hyperalgesia as described above. Compounds that relieve pain in this model result in a statistically significant reduction in mechanical allodynia, mechanical hyperalgesia and/or thermal hyperalgesia when administered (0.01-50 mg/kg, orally, parenterally or topically) immediately prior to testing as a single bolus, or for several days: once or twice or three times daily prior to testing.

Claims

CLAIMSWhat is claimed is:
1. A compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000088_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
Ar is a 6- to 10-membered aryl or a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, each of which is substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, Ci- C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6hydroxyalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, Ci-
C6haloalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino; Ri is:
(i) hydrogen, halogen, hydroxy, amino or cyano; or
(ii) Ci-Cόalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, mono- or di-(C]-C6alkyl)amino, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted and each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from R7; R2 is:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen or cyano;
(ii) Ci-C6alkyl, CrC6haloalkyl, CrC6alkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, or phenyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from R7; or (iii) a group of the formula:
Figure imgf000088_0002
wherein R5 and R6 are independently chosen from hydrogen, Ci-Qalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, CrC6alkanoyl, CrCealkylsulfonyl and (4- to
7-membered heterocycle)Co-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from R7; or R5 and R6 are taken together to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from R7; and R3 is:
(i) (C3-C7cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-Cβalkyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl and substituents that are taken together to form a fused C3-C7cycloalkyl or a Ci-C3alkylene bridge; (ii) Ci-C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, C1-C6IIaIOaIkOXy, Ci-C6alkylthio, Ci-Cόhaloalkylthio or mono- or di-(C)-C6alkyl)amino, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from R7, phenyl and 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, which phenyl and heteroaryl are substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from R7, such that R3 is not unsubstituted benzylthio; or
(iii) phenoxy that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from R7; and each R7 is independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, Ci-Cόalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6hydroxyalkyl, CrC6alkoxy, Ci- Cβhaloalkoxy, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, and mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino.
2. A compound or salt thereof according to claim 1, wherein Ar is phenyl that is substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, nitro or Ci- Qsalkyl.
3. A compound or salt thereof according to claim 1, wherein Ar is pyridyl that is substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, nitro or Cj- Cβalkyl.
4. A compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein Ri is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, Ci-C4alkyl, (C3-C5cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, or phenyl that is unsubstituted or substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, oxo, Ci-C4alkyl, Ci-C4haloalkyl, Ci-C4alkoxy and Ci-C4haloalkoxy.
5. A compound or salt thereof according to claim 4, wherein Ri is hydrogen, cyano, halogen, Ci-C4alkyl or Ci-C4alkanoyl.
6. A compound or salt thereof according to claim 5, wherein Rj is bromo, chloro, fluoro, iodo, methyl or ethyl.
7. A compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein R2 is Ci- Cβalkyl.
8. A compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein R2 is Cj- C6hydroxyalkyl, Ci-Coaminoalkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether or Ci-Cόhaloalkyl.
9. A compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein R2 is a group of the formula:
"β wherein R5 and R6 are independently chosen from hydrogen, Ci-Cβalkyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-
C4alkyl, Ci-Cβalkanoyl, and C]-C6alkylsulfonyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from R7, such that at least one of R5 and R6 is not hydrogen; or R5 and R6 are taken together to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from R7.
10. A compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-9, wherein R3 is (C3- C7cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl that is substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently chosen from Ci-C6alkyl, halogen, C)-C6haloalkyl and substituents that are taken together to form a fused C3-C7cycloalkyl or a Ci-C3alkylene bridge.
11. A compound or salt thereof according to claim 10, wherein R3 is C5-C7cycloalkyl that is substituted with from 1 to 2 substituents independently chosen from Ci-C4alkyl, halogen and Ci-C4haloalkyl.
12. A compound or salt thereof according to claim 11 , wherein R3 is:
Figure imgf000090_0001
13. A compound or salt thereof according to claim 12, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure imgf000090_0002
wherein:
A is CH or N;
R4 represents from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, Ci-C6alkyl, CrC6haloalkyl, Ci-C6hydroxyalkyl, CrC6alkoxy and Cr Cόhaloalkoxy; and Rx is Ci-C4alkyl or Ci-C4haloalkyl.
14. A compound or salt thereof according to claim 13, wherein the compound has the formula:
wherein: A is CH or N;
R4 represents from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, Ci-Cδalkyl, Ci-Cόhaloalkyl, Ci-Cohydroxyalkyl, Q-Cόalkoxy and Ci- Cόhaloalkoxy; and Rx is CrC4alkyl or Ci-Gjhaloalkyl.
15. A compound or salt thereof according to claim 13 or claim 14, wherein Rx is methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, t-butyl, difluoromethyl or trifluoromethyl.
16. A compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-9, wherein R3 is a group of the formula:
-j'-x Y wherein:
X is O, S or NH; n is 1, 2 or 3; and
Y is Ci-C2haloalkyl, phenyl or a 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, each of which phenyl or heteroaryl is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, Ci- Cβalkyl, or Ci-Cδhaloalkyl, such that R3 is not benzylthio.
17. A compound or salt thereof according to claim 16, wherein R3 is C2- Cehaloalkylthio, or a group of the formula:
Figure imgf000091_0002
wherein R8 represents from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, Cj-Cόalkyl, or Ci-Cehaloalkyl.
18. A compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-9, wherein R3 is phenoxy that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, Q- C6alkyl, or C,-C6haloalkyl.
19. A compound or salt thereof according to claim 1 , wherein the compound is: 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 5-bromo-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one;
3-(4-fluorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 5-bromo-3-(4-fluorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one;
6-methyl-3-phenyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 3-(3-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 4-{4-methyl-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-l(6H)-yl}benzonitrile; 3-(3,4-difluorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 3-(6-chloropyridin-3-yl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 3-(4-bromophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 6-methyl-3-(4-methylphenyl)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(2-methoxyethyl)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one; 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one; 3-(4-chloro-2-nitrophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one;
3-(4-chlorophenyl)-5,6-dimethyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-5-cyclopropyl-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-
4(3H)-one;
1 -(4-chlorophenyl)-4-methyl-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]- 1 ,6- dihydropyrimidine-5 -carbonitrile;
3-(4-chlorophenyl)-5-fluoro-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one; 4-{5-bromo-4-methyl-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-l(6H)- yl}benzonitrile; 4- {4,5-dimethyl-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin- 1 (6H)-yl} benzonitrile; -chloro-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one; -(4-chlorophenyl)-5-ethyl-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one; -acetyl-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one; - { 5-chloro-4-methyl-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin- 1 (6H)- yl}benzonitrile; -(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-(4-methylcyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; -(4-chlorophenyl)-6-ethyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; -(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(trifluoromethyl)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one; -(4-chlorophenyl)-5-iodo-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one; -(4-chlorophenyl)-6-isopropyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one;-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-isopropyl-2-[trans-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one;-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-5-phenyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one; -(4-chlorophenyl)-6-isopropyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one;-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-isopropyl-2-[trans-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one;-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(methoxymethyl)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one; -(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(hydroxymethyl)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyriniidin-4(3H)- one; -(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-5-( 1 ,3-thiazol-2-yl)-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; -(aminomethyl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one; -amino-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyriπiidin-4(3H)-one; -(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(dimethylamino)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one; -(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(methylamino)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one; -(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(ethylamino)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 4-[4-(hydroxymethyl)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-l(6H)- yl]benzonitrile
5-chloro-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(methylamino)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin- 4(3H)-one;
5-chloro-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(methylamino)-2-[trans-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one;
4-[4-(methylamino)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-l(6H)- yl]benzonitrile;
3-(4-chlorophenyl)-5-methyl-6-(methylamino)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin- 4(3H)-one;
2-(3-(tτifluoromethyl)benzylamino)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-5,6-dimethylpyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-5,6-dimethyl-2-(3,3,3-trifluoropropylthio)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one;
3-(benzo[d]thiazol-6-yl)-5-chloro-6-ethyl-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)- one;
5-(5-chloro-4-(methylamino)-6-oxo-2-(cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-l(6H)- yl)picolinonitrile; cis-2-bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methylpyrimidin-4(3H)-one); 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-cw-(3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclobutyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 2-(bicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-yl)-3-(4-fluorophenyl)-6-methylpyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-[4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohex-3-en-l-yl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one;
4-[5-chloro-4-(methylamino)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-l(6H)- yl]benzonitrile;
4-[5-methyl-4-(methylamino)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-l(6H)- yljbenzonitrile;
3-(4-chlorophenyl)-5-hydroxy-6-methyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)- one;
3-(5-chloropyridin-2-yl)-6-ethyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 5-bromo-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-cyclopentyl-6-ethylpyrimidin-4(3H)-one;
5-chloro-3-(5-chloropyridin-2-yl)-6-ethyl-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin- 4(3H)-one;
3-(6-cUoropyridin-3-yl)-6-(hydroxymethyl)-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin- 4(3H)-one;
3-(l,3-benzothiazol-6-yl)-6-ethyl-2-[4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one;
5-chloro-3-(6-chloropyridin-3-yl)-6-(methylamino)-2-[cis-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-4(3H)-one;
5-[5-chloro-4-(methylamino)-6-oxo-2-[cis-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl]pyrimidin-l(6H)- yl]pyridine-2-carboxamide;
3-(4-fluorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-(3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyriniidin-4(3H)-one; 5-bromo-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-(3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclobutyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-5,6-dimethyl-2-(3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclobutyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one;
3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-(6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-6-methylpyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 3-(2-chloropyτimidin-5-yl)-6-methyl-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one;
5-(4-methyl-6-oxo-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-l(6H)-yl)pyrimidine-2- carbonitrile;
3-(5-chlorothiazol-2-yl)-6-methyl-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one;
6-methyl-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)-3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-2-yl)pyrimidin-4(3H)- one; 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-(6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-5,6-dimethylpyrimidin-4(3H)-one;
5-chloro-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-2-(3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclobutyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)- one;
5-chloro-3-(5-chloropyridin-2-yl)-2-(6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-6-methylpyrimidin- 4(3H)-one;
5-chloro-3-(5-chloropyridin-2-yl)-2-(6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-6- (methylamino)pyrimidin-4(3 H)-one;
4-(5-chloro-2-(6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-4-(methylamino)-6-oxopyrimidin- 1 (6H)- yl)benzonitrile;
4-(2-(6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-4,5-dimethyl-6-oxopyrimidin-l (6H)- yl)benzonitrile;
3-(6-chloropyridin-3-yl)-2-(6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-6-methylpyrimidin-4(3H)- one;
4-(2-(6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-4-(methylamino)-6-oxopyrimidin-l(6H)- yl)benzonitrile;
2-(6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-3-(4-fluorophenyl)-6-(methylamino)pyrimidin-4(3H)- one;
5-(2-(6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-4-methyl-6-oxopyrimidin-l(6H)-yl)picolinonitrile;
5-bromo-3-(5-chloropyridin-2-yl)-2-(6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-6- (methylamino)pyrimidin-4(3 H)-one;
2-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-5-chloro-3-(4-fluorophenyl)-6-(methylamino)pyrimidin-4(3H)- one;
5-(4,5-dimethyl-6-oxo-2-(3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclobutyl)pyriniidin-l(6H)-yl)picolinonitrile; 6-(2-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-5-chloro-4-methyl-6-oxopyrimidin- 1 (6H)-yl)nicotinonitrile;
2-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-3-(4-fluorophenyl)-5-methyl-6-(methylamino)pyrimidin-4(3H)- one;
2-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(methylamino)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 2-(bicyclo[3JO]hexan-3-yl)-3-(5-chloropyridin-2-yl)-6-methylpytimidin-4(3H)-one; 4-(2-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3 -yl)-4-methyl-6-oxopyrimidin- 1 (6H)-yl)benzonitrile; 2-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-3-(4-fluorophenyl)-6-methylpyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 2-(bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-3-(6-chloropyridin-3-yl)-6-(methylamino)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one;
6-(2-bicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-5-bromo-4-(methylamino)-6-oxopyrimidin-l(6H)- yl)nicotinonitrile;
5-chloro-6-(methylamino)-3-(thiophen-2-yl)-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)- one;
6-(methylamino)-3-(thiophen-3-yl)-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one;
6-methyl-3-(5-(trifluoromethyl)- 1 ,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)-2-(4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one;
3-(5-chloropyrazin-2-yl)-6-methyl-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; 6-methyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one;
3-(benzo[d]thiazol-5-yl)-5-chloro-6-methyl-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)- one;
3-(benzo[d]oxazol-5-yl)-5-chloro-6-methyl-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)- one;
5-(2-(bicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-2-yl)-4-methyl-6-oxopyrimidin-l(6H)-yl)picolinonitrile; 5-(4-methyl-6-oxo-2-(3-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-l(6H)-yl)picolinonitrile;
6-methyl-3-(5-methylthiazol-2-yl)-2-((ls,4s)-4-(trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)- one;
5-chloro-6-(methylamino)-3-(5-methylthiophen-2-yl)-2-(( 1 s,4s)-4- (trifluoromethyl)cyclohexyl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one; or
5-chloro-2-((l S,3r,5R)-6,6-difluorobicyclo[3.1.0]hexan-3-yl)-6-methyl-3-(2-methylthiazol-5- yl)pyrimidin-4(3H)-one.
20. A compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-19, wherein the compound exhibits no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of capsaicin receptor agonism.
21. A compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-20, wherein the compound is capable of exhibiting an IC50 value of 1 micromolar or less in a capsaicin receptor calcium mobilization assay.
22. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising at least one compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1 -21 in combination with a physiologically acceptable carriefor excipient.
23. A pharmaceutical composition according to claim 22, wherein the composition is formulated as an injectable fluid, an aerosol, a cream, an oral liquid, a tablet, a gel, a pill, a capsule, a syrup, or a transdermal patch.
24. A method for reducing calcium conductance of a cellular capsaicin receptor, comprising contacting a cell expressing a capsaicin receptor with at least one compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-21, and thereby reducing calcium conductance of the capsaicin receptor.
25. A method according to claim 24, wherein the cell is contacted in vivo in an animal.
26. A method according to claim 25, wherein the cell is a neuronal cell.
27. A method according to claim 25, wherein the cell is a urothelial cell.
28. A method according to claim 25, wherein during contact the compound or salt thereof is present within a body fluid of the animal.
29. A method according to claim 25, wherein the animal is a human.
30. A method according to claim 25, wherein the compound is administered orally.
31. A method for inhibiting binding of vanilloid ligand to a capsaicin receptor in vitro, the method comprising contacting capsaicin receptor with at least one compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-21, under conditions and in an amount sufficient to detectably inhibit vanilloid ligand binding to capsaicin receptor.
32. A method for inhibiting binding of vanilloid ligand to capsaicin receptor in a patient, comprising contacting cells expressing capsaicin receptor with at least one compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-21, in an amount sufficient to detectably inhibit vanilloid ligand binding to cells expressing a cloned capsaicin receptor in vitro, and thereby inhibiting binding of vanilloid ligand to the capsaicin receptor in the patient.
33. A method according to claim 32, wherein the patient is a human.
34. A method for treating a condition responsive to capsaicin receptor modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-21, and thereby alleviating the condition in the patient.
35. A method according to claim 34, wherein the patient is suffering from (i) exposure to capsaicin, (ii) burn or irritation due to exposure to heat, (iii) burns or irritation due to exposure to light, (iv) burn, bronchoconstriction or irritation due to exposure to tear gas, infectious agents, air pollutants or pepper spray, or (v) burn or irritation due to exposure to acid.
36. A method according to claim 34, wherein the condition is asthma or chrome obstructive pulmonary disease.
37. A method for treating pain in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from pain a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-21, and thereby alleviating pain in the patient.
38. A method according to claim 37, wherein the patient is suffering from neuropathic pain.
39. A method according to claim 37, wherein the pain is associated with a condition selected from: postmastectomy pain syndrome, stump pain, phantom limb pain, oral neuropathic pain, toothache, postherpetic neuralgia, diabetic neuropathy, reflex sympathetic dystrophy, trigeminal neuralgia, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, fibromyalgia, Guillain-Barre syndrome, meralgia paresthetica, burning-mouth syndrome, bilateral peripheral neuropathy, causalgia, neuritis, neuronitis, neuralgia, AIDS-related neuropathy, MS-related neuropathy, spinal cord injury-related pain, surgery-related pain, musculoskeletal pain, back pain, headache, migraine, angina, labor, hemorrhoids, dyspepsia, Charcot's pains, intestinal gas, menstruation, cancer, venom exposure, irritable bowel syndrome, inflammatory bowel disease and trauma.
40. A method according to claim 37, wherein the patient is a human.
41. A method for treating itch in a patient, comprising administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1 - 21, and thereby alleviating itch in the patient.
42. A method for treating cough or hiccup in a patient, comprising administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-21, and thereby alleviating cough or hiccup in the patient.
43. A method for treating symptoms of menopause in a patient, comprising administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-21, and thereby alleviating symptoms of menopause in the patient.
44. A method for treating urinary incontinence or overactive bladder in a patient, comprising administering to a patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-21, and thereby alleviating urinary incontinence or overactive bladder in the patient.
45. A compound or salt thereof according to claim 1, wherein the compound is radiolabeled.
46. A method for determining the presence or absence of capsaicin receptor in a sample, comprising the steps of:
(a) contacting a sample with a compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-21, under conditions that permit binding of the compound to capsaicin receptor; and (b) detecting a signal indicative of a level of the compound or salt thereof bound to capsaicin receptor, and therefrom determining the presence or absence of capsaicin receptor in the sample.
47. A method according to claim 46, wherein the compound or salt thereof is radiolabeled, and wherein the step of detection comprises the steps of:
(i) separating unbound compound from bound compound; and
(ii) detecting the presence or absence of bound radiolabel in the sample.
48. A packaged pharmaceutical preparation, comprising:
(a) a pharmaceutical composition according to claim 22 in a container; and (b) instructions for using the composition to treat pain.
49. A packaged pharmaceutical preparation, comprising:
(a) a pharmaceutical composition according to claim 22 in a container; and
(b) instructions for using the composition to treat cough or hiccup.
50. A packaged pharmaceutical preparation, comprising: (a) a pharmaceutical composition according to claim 22 in a container; and
(b) instructions for using the composition to treat urinary incontinence or overactive bladder.
51. The use of a compound or salt thereof according to any one of claims 1-21 for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a condition responsive to capsaicin receptor modulation.
52. A use according to claim 51, wherein the condition is pain; asthma; chronic obstructive pulmonary disease; cough; hiccup; urinary incontinence; overactive bladder; menopause; exposure to capsaicin; burn or irritation due to exposure to heat; burn or irritation due to exposure to light; burn, bronchoconstriction or irritation due to exposure to tear gas, infectious agents, air pollutants or pepper spray; or burn or irritation due to exposure to acid.
PCT/US2008/007278 2007-06-12 2008-06-11 Substituted pyrimidinones WO2008156607A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US94354707P 2007-06-12 2007-06-12
US60/943,547 2007-06-12
US1642907P 2007-12-21 2007-12-21
US61/016,429 2007-12-21
US2243208P 2008-01-21 2008-01-21
US61/022,432 2008-01-21

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2008156607A1 true WO2008156607A1 (en) 2008-12-24

Family

ID=40156511

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2008/007278 WO2008156607A1 (en) 2007-06-12 2008-06-11 Substituted pyrimidinones

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2008156607A1 (en)

Cited By (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8003656B2 (en) 2006-08-23 2011-08-23 Neurogen Corporation 2-phenoxy pyrimidinone analogues
WO2012011592A1 (en) * 2010-07-23 2012-01-26 武田薬品工業株式会社 Heterocyclic compound and application thereof
CN103748079A (en) * 2011-08-22 2014-04-23 武田药品工业株式会社 Pyridazinone compounds and their use as DAAO inhibitors
US9180122B2 (en) 2011-07-07 2015-11-10 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited 5- or 6-substituted 3-hydroxy-2 (1 H)-pyridinones as D-amino acid oxidase (DAAO) inhibitors in therapy of diseases such as schizophrenia, cognitive disorder and pain
US9212147B2 (en) 2011-11-15 2015-12-15 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dihydroxy aromatic heterocyclic compound
US9434695B2 (en) 2012-07-18 2016-09-06 Sunshine Lake Pharma Co., Ltd Nitrogenous heterocyclic derivatives and their application in drugs
US9750748B2 (en) 2012-12-17 2017-09-05 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Pyridazinones as DAAO enzyme inhibitors
US9902712B2 (en) 2013-12-19 2018-02-27 Sunshine Lake Pharma Co., Ltd. Nitrogenous heterocyclic derivatives and their application in drugs
US10085986B2 (en) 2011-07-07 2018-10-02 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Pyrimidinone compounds and their use

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5100897A (en) * 1989-08-28 1992-03-31 Merck & Co., Inc. Substituted pyrimidinones as angiotensin ii antagonists
US20040259887A1 (en) * 2003-06-18 2004-12-23 Pfizer Inc Cannabinoid receptor ligands and uses thereof
WO2006122200A1 (en) * 2005-05-11 2006-11-16 Merck Sharp & Dohme Limited 2,3-substituted fused bicyclic pyrimidin-4(3h)-ones modulating the function of the vanilloid-1 receptor (vr1)

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5100897A (en) * 1989-08-28 1992-03-31 Merck & Co., Inc. Substituted pyrimidinones as angiotensin ii antagonists
US20040259887A1 (en) * 2003-06-18 2004-12-23 Pfizer Inc Cannabinoid receptor ligands and uses thereof
WO2006122200A1 (en) * 2005-05-11 2006-11-16 Merck Sharp & Dohme Limited 2,3-substituted fused bicyclic pyrimidin-4(3h)-ones modulating the function of the vanilloid-1 receptor (vr1)

Cited By (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8003656B2 (en) 2006-08-23 2011-08-23 Neurogen Corporation 2-phenoxy pyrimidinone analogues
US8759361B2 (en) 2006-08-23 2014-06-24 Neurogen Corporation 2-phenoxy pyrimidinone analogues
WO2012011592A1 (en) * 2010-07-23 2012-01-26 武田薬品工業株式会社 Heterocyclic compound and application thereof
US10085986B2 (en) 2011-07-07 2018-10-02 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Pyrimidinone compounds and their use
US9180122B2 (en) 2011-07-07 2015-11-10 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited 5- or 6-substituted 3-hydroxy-2 (1 H)-pyridinones as D-amino acid oxidase (DAAO) inhibitors in therapy of diseases such as schizophrenia, cognitive disorder and pain
US9931340B2 (en) 2011-08-22 2018-04-03 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Pyridazinone compounds and their use as DAAO inhibitors
CN103748079B (en) * 2011-08-22 2016-03-16 武田药品工业株式会社 Pyridazinone mixture and the purposes as DAAO inhibitor thereof
US9290456B2 (en) 2011-08-22 2016-03-22 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Pyridazinone compounds and their use as DAAO inhibitors
CN103748079A (en) * 2011-08-22 2014-04-23 武田药品工业株式会社 Pyridazinone compounds and their use as DAAO inhibitors
US10463663B2 (en) 2011-08-22 2019-11-05 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Pyridazinone compounds and their use as DAAO inhibitors
US11129828B2 (en) 2011-08-22 2021-09-28 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Pyridazinone compounds and their use as DAAO inhibitors
US9562020B2 (en) 2011-11-15 2017-02-07 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dihydroxy aromatic heterocyclic compound
US9212147B2 (en) 2011-11-15 2015-12-15 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dihydroxy aromatic heterocyclic compound
US10202399B2 (en) 2011-11-15 2019-02-12 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dihydroxy aromatic heterocyclic compound
US9434695B2 (en) 2012-07-18 2016-09-06 Sunshine Lake Pharma Co., Ltd Nitrogenous heterocyclic derivatives and their application in drugs
US9750748B2 (en) 2012-12-17 2017-09-05 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Pyridazinones as DAAO enzyme inhibitors
US9902712B2 (en) 2013-12-19 2018-02-27 Sunshine Lake Pharma Co., Ltd. Nitrogenous heterocyclic derivatives and their application in drugs

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CA2660957C (en) 2-phenoxy pyrimidinone analogues
WO2006078992A2 (en) Heteroaryl substituted piperazinyl-pyridine analogues
WO2008156607A1 (en) Substituted pyrimidinones
US20080175794A1 (en) Substituted Pyridazinyl- and Pyrimidinyl-Quinolin-4-Ylamine Analogues
WO2006076646A2 (en) Heteroaryl substituted quinolin-4-ylamine analogues
US20080090845A1 (en) Haloalkyl-substituted pyrimidinone derivatives
EP1678149A2 (en) 4-amino(aza)quinoline derivatives as capsaicin receptor agonists
EP1811845A2 (en) Substituted biaryl quinolin-4-ylamine analogues
US20100008866A1 (en) Cis-cyclohexyl substituted pyrimidinone derivatives
WO2005023807A2 (en) 4 - heterobicyclyamino - substituted quinazolines and analogues therof as capsaicin - antagonists
US20070219203A1 (en) Arylalkylamino-substituted quinazoline analogues
AU2005317176A1 (en) Piperazinyl-pyridine analogues
EP1824839A2 (en) Substituted biaryl analogues
WO2009121036A2 (en) Substituted aryl pyrimidinone derivatives
WO2009100403A1 (en) Substituted aryl pyrimidinones

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 08768336

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 08768336

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1